initial commit

47 files changed, 12584 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/CA.pl.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/CA.pl.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d326101
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/CA.pl.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+CA.pl - friendlier interface for OpenSSL certificate programs
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<CA.pl>
+[B<-?>]
+[B<-h>]
+[B<-help>]
+[B<-newcert>]
+[B<-newreq>]
+[B<-newreq-nodes>]
+[B<-newca>]
+[B<-xsign>]
+[B<-sign>]
+[B<-signreq>]
+[B<-signcert>]
+[B<-verify>]
+[B<files>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<CA.pl> script is a perl script that supplies the relevant command line
+arguments to the B<openssl> command for some common certificate operations.
+It is intended to simplify the process of certificate creation and management
+by the use of some simple options.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<?>, B<-h>, B<-help>
+
+prints a usage message.
+
+=item B<-newcert>
+
+creates a new self signed certificate. The private key is written to the file
+"newkey.pem" and the request written to the file "newreq.pem".
+
+=item B<-newreq>
+
+creates a new certificate request. The private key is written to the file
+"newkey.pem" and the request written to the file "newreq.pem".
+
+=item B<-newreq-nodes>
+
+is like B<-newreq> except that the private key will not be encrypted.
+
+=item B<-newca>
+
+creates a new CA hierarchy for use with the B<ca> program (or the B<-signcert>
+and B<-xsign> options). The user is prompted to enter the filename of the CA
+certificates (which should also contain the private key) or by hitting ENTER
+details of the CA will be prompted for. The relevant files and directories
+are created in a directory called "demoCA" in the current directory.
+
+=item B<-pkcs12>
+
+create a PKCS#12 file containing the user certificate, private key and CA
+certificate. It expects the user certificate and private key to be in the
+file "newcert.pem" and the CA certificate to be in the file demoCA/cacert.pem,
+it creates a file "newcert.p12". This command can thus be called after the
+B<-sign> option. The PKCS#12 file can be imported directly into a browser.
+If there is an additional argument on the command line it will be used as the
+"friendly name" for the certificate (which is typically displayed in the browser
+list box), otherwise the name "My Certificate" is used.
+
+=item B<-sign>, B<-signreq>, B<-xsign>
+
+calls the B<ca> program to sign a certificate request. It expects the request
+to be in the file "newreq.pem". The new certificate is written to the file
+"newcert.pem" except in the case of the B<-xsign> option when it is written
+to standard output.
+
+
+=item B<-signCA>
+
+this option is the same as the B<-signreq> option except it uses the configuration
+file section B<v3_ca> and so makes the signed request a valid CA certificate. This
+is useful when creating intermediate CA from a root CA.
+
+=item B<-signcert>
+
+this option is the same as B<-sign> except it expects a self signed certificate
+to be present in the file "newreq.pem".
+
+=item B<-verify>
+
+verifies certificates against the CA certificate for "demoCA". If no certificates
+are specified on the command line it tries to verify the file "newcert.pem". 
+
+=item B<files>
+
+one or more optional certificate file names for use with the B<-verify> command.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Create a CA hierarchy:
+
+ CA.pl -newca
+
+Complete certificate creation example: create a CA, create a request, sign
+the request and finally create a PKCS#12 file containing it.
+
+ CA.pl -newca
+ CA.pl -newreq
+ CA.pl -signreq
+ CA.pl -pkcs12 "My Test Certificate"
+
+=head1 DSA CERTIFICATES
+
+Although the B<CA.pl> creates RSA CAs and requests it is still possible to
+use it with DSA certificates and requests using the L<req(1)|req(1)> command
+directly. The following example shows the steps that would typically be taken.
+
+Create some DSA parameters:
+
+ openssl dsaparam -out dsap.pem 1024
+
+Create a DSA CA certificate and private key:
+
+ openssl req -x509 -newkey dsa:dsap.pem -keyout cacert.pem -out cacert.pem
+
+Create the CA directories and files:
+
+ CA.pl -newca
+
+enter cacert.pem when prompted for the CA file name.
+
+Create a DSA certificate request and private key (a different set of parameters
+can optionally be created first):
+
+ openssl req -out newreq.pem -newkey dsa:dsap.pem 
+
+Sign the request:
+
+ CA.pl -signreq
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Most of the filenames mentioned can be modified by editing the B<CA.pl> script.
+
+If the demoCA directory already exists then the B<-newca> command will not
+overwrite it and will do nothing. This can happen if a previous call using
+the B<-newca> option terminated abnormally. To get the correct behaviour
+delete the demoCA directory if it already exists.
+
+Under some environments it may not be possible to run the B<CA.pl> script
+directly (for example Win32) and the default configuration file location may
+be wrong. In this case the command:
+
+ perl -S CA.pl
+
+can be used and the B<OPENSSL_CONF> environment variable changed to point to 
+the correct path of the configuration file "openssl.cnf".
+
+The script is intended as a simple front end for the B<openssl> program for use
+by a beginner. Its behaviour isn't always what is wanted. For more control over the
+behaviour of the certificate commands call the B<openssl> command directly.
+
+=head1 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+
+The variable B<OPENSSL_CONF> if defined allows an alternative configuration
+file location to be specified, it should contain the full path to the
+configuration file, not just its directory.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<x509(1)|x509(1)>, L<ca(1)|ca(1)>, L<req(1)|req(1)>, L<pkcs12(1)|pkcs12(1)>,
+L<config(5)|config(5)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/asn1parse.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/asn1parse.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76a765d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/asn1parse.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+asn1parse - ASN.1 parsing tool
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<asn1parse>
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-offset number>]
+[B<-length number>]
+[B<-i>]
+[B<-oid filename>]
+[B<-dump>]
+[B<-dlimit num>]
+[B<-strparse offset>]
+[B<-genstr string>]
+[B<-genconf file>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<asn1parse> command is a diagnostic utility that can parse ASN.1
+structures. It can also be used to extract data from ASN.1 formatted data.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform> B<DER|PEM>
+
+the input format. B<DER> is binary format and B<PEM> (the default) is base64
+encoded.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+the input file, default is standard input
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+output file to place the DER encoded data into. If this
+option is not present then no data will be output. This is most useful when
+combined with the B<-strparse> option.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+don't output the parsed version of the input file.
+
+=item B<-offset number>
+
+starting offset to begin parsing, default is start of file.
+
+=item B<-length number>
+
+number of bytes to parse, default is until end of file.
+
+=item B<-i>
+
+indents the output according to the "depth" of the structures.
+
+=item B<-oid filename>
+
+a file containing additional OBJECT IDENTIFIERs (OIDs). The format of this
+file is described in the NOTES section below.
+
+=item B<-dump>
+
+dump unknown data in hex format.
+
+=item B<-dlimit num>
+
+like B<-dump>, but only the first B<num> bytes are output.
+
+=item B<-strparse offset>
+
+parse the contents octets of the ASN.1 object starting at B<offset>. This
+option can be used multiple times to "drill down" into a nested structure.
+
+=item B<-genstr string>, B<-genconf file>
+
+generate encoded data based on B<string>, B<file> or both using
+L<ASN1_generate_nconf(3)|ASN1_generate_nconf(3)> format. If B<file> only is
+present then the string is obtained from the default section using the name
+B<asn1>. The encoded data is passed through the ASN1 parser and printed out as
+though it came from a file, the contents can thus be examined and written to a
+file using the B<out> option. 
+
+=back
+
+=head2 OUTPUT
+
+The output will typically contain lines like this:
+
+  0:d=0  hl=4 l= 681 cons: SEQUENCE          
+
+.....
+
+  229:d=3  hl=3 l= 141 prim: BIT STRING        
+  373:d=2  hl=3 l= 162 cons: cont [ 3 ]        
+  376:d=3  hl=3 l= 159 cons: SEQUENCE          
+  379:d=4  hl=2 l=  29 cons: SEQUENCE          
+  381:d=5  hl=2 l=   3 prim: OBJECT            :X509v3 Subject Key Identifier
+  386:d=5  hl=2 l=  22 prim: OCTET STRING      
+  410:d=4  hl=2 l= 112 cons: SEQUENCE          
+  412:d=5  hl=2 l=   3 prim: OBJECT            :X509v3 Authority Key Identifier
+  417:d=5  hl=2 l= 105 prim: OCTET STRING      
+  524:d=4  hl=2 l=  12 cons: SEQUENCE          
+
+.....
+
+This example is part of a self signed certificate. Each line starts with the
+offset in decimal. B<d=XX> specifies the current depth. The depth is increased
+within the scope of any SET or SEQUENCE. B<hl=XX> gives the header length
+(tag and length octets) of the current type. B<l=XX> gives the length of
+the contents octets.
+
+The B<-i> option can be used to make the output more readable.
+
+Some knowledge of the ASN.1 structure is needed to interpret the output. 
+
+In this example the BIT STRING at offset 229 is the certificate public key.
+The contents octets of this will contain the public key information. This can
+be examined using the option B<-strparse 229> to yield:
+
+    0:d=0  hl=3 l= 137 cons: SEQUENCE          
+    3:d=1  hl=3 l= 129 prim: INTEGER           :E5D21E1F5C8D208EA7A2166C7FAF9F6BDF2059669C60876DDB70840F1A5AAFA59699FE471F379F1DD6A487E7D5409AB6A88D4A9746E24B91D8CF55DB3521015460C8EDE44EE8A4189F7A7BE77D6CD3A9AF2696F486855CF58BF0EDF2B4068058C7A947F52548DDF7E15E96B385F86422BEA9064A3EE9E1158A56E4A6F47E5897
+  135:d=1  hl=2 l=   3 prim: INTEGER           :010001
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+If an OID is not part of OpenSSL's internal table it will be represented in
+numerical form (for example 1.2.3.4). The file passed to the B<-oid> option 
+allows additional OIDs to be included. Each line consists of three columns,
+the first column is the OID in numerical format and should be followed by white
+space. The second column is the "short name" which is a single word followed
+by white space. The final column is the rest of the line and is the
+"long name". B<asn1parse> displays the long name. Example:
+
+C<1.2.3.4	shortName	A long name>
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Parse a file:
+
+ openssl asn1parse -in file.pem
+
+Parse a DER file:
+
+ openssl asn1parse -inform DER -in file.der
+
+Generate a simple UTF8String:
+
+ openssl asn1parse -genstr 'UTF8:Hello World'
+
+Generate and write out a UTF8String, don't print parsed output:
+
+ openssl asn1parse -genstr 'UTF8:Hello World' -noout -out utf8.der
+
+Generate using a config file:
+
+ openssl asn1parse -genconf asn1.cnf -noout -out asn1.der
+
+Example config file:
+
+ asn1=SEQUENCE:seq_sect
+
+ [seq_sect]
+
+ field1=BOOL:TRUE
+ field2=EXP:0, UTF8:some random string
+
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+There should be options to change the format of output lines. The output of some
+ASN.1 types is not well handled (if at all).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ASN1_generate_nconf(3)|ASN1_generate_nconf(3)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/c_rehash.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/c_rehash.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ccce29e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/c_rehash.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+=pod
+
+=for comment
+Original text by James Westby, contributed under the OpenSSL license.
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+c_rehash - Create symbolic links to files named by the hash values
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<c_rehash>
+B<[-old]>
+B<[-h]>
+B<[-n]>
+B<[-v]>
+[ I<directory>...]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+B<c_rehash> scans directories and calculates a hash value of each
+C<.pem>, C<.crt>, C<.cer>, or C<.crl>
+file in the specified directory list and creates symbolic links
+for each file, where the name of the link is the hash value.
+(If the platform does not support symbolic links, a copy is made.)
+This utility is useful as many programs that use OpenSSL require
+directories to be set up like this in order to find certificates.
+
+If any directories are named on the command line, then those are
+processed in turn. If not, then the B<SSL_CERT_DIR> environment variable
+is consulted; this shold be a colon-separated list of directories,
+like the Unix B<PATH> variable.
+If that is not set then the default directory (installation-specific
+but often B</usr/local/ssl/certs>) is processed.
+
+In order for a directory to be processed, the user must have write
+permissions on that directory, otherwise it will be skipped.
+The links created are of the form C<HHHHHHHH.D>, where each B<H>
+is a hexadecimal character and B<D> is a single decimal digit.
+When processing a directory, B<c_rehash> will first remove all links
+that have a name in that syntax. If you have links in that format
+used for other purposes, they will be removed.
+To skip the removal step, use the B<-n> flag.
+Hashes for CRL's look similar except the letter B<r> appears after
+the period, like this: C<HHHHHHHH.rD>.
+
+Multiple objects may have the same hash; they will be indicated by
+incrementing the B<D> value. Duplicates are found by comparing the
+full SHA-1 fingerprint. A warning will be displayed if a duplicate
+is found.
+
+A warning will also be displayed if there are files that
+cannot be parsed as either a certificate or a CRL.
+
+The program uses the B<openssl> program to compute the hashes and
+fingerprints. If not found in the user's B<PATH>, then set the
+B<OPENSSL> environment variable to the full pathname.
+Any program can be used, it will be invoked as follows for either
+a certificate or CRL:
+
+  $OPENSSL x509 -hash -fingerprint -noout -in FILENAME
+  $OPENSSL crl -hash -fingerprint -noout -in FILENAME
+
+where B<FILENAME> is the filename. It must output the hash of the
+file on the first line, and the fingerprint on the second,
+optionally prefixed with some text and an equals sign.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-old>
+
+Use old-style hashing (MD5, as opposed to SHA-1) for generating
+links for releases before 1.0.0.  Note that current versions will
+not use the old style.
+
+=item B<-h>
+
+Display a brief usage message.
+
+=item B<-n>
+
+Do not remove existing links.
+This is needed when keeping new and old-style links in the same directory.
+
+=item B<-v>
+
+Print messages about old links removed and new links created.
+By default, B<c_rehash> only lists each directory as it is processed.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 ENVIRONMENT
+
+=over
+
+=item B<OPENSSL>
+
+The path to an executable to use to generate hashes and
+fingerprints (see above).
+
+=item B<SSL_CERT_DIR>
+
+Colon separated list of directories to operate on.
+Ignored if directories are listed on the command line.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>,
+L<crl(1)|crl(1)>.
+L<x509(1)|x509(1)>.
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/ca.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/ca.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c90e648
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/ca.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,696 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ca - sample minimal CA application
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<ca>
+[B<-verbose>]
+[B<-config filename>]
+[B<-name section>]
+[B<-gencrl>]
+[B<-revoke file>]
+[B<-status serial>]
+[B<-updatedb>]
+[B<-crl_reason reason>]
+[B<-crl_hold instruction>]
+[B<-crl_compromise time>]
+[B<-crl_CA_compromise time>]
+[B<-crldays days>]
+[B<-crlhours hours>]
+[B<-crlexts section>]
+[B<-startdate date>]
+[B<-enddate date>]
+[B<-days arg>]
+[B<-md arg>]
+[B<-policy arg>]
+[B<-keyfile arg>]
+[B<-keyform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-key arg>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-cert file>]
+[B<-selfsign>]
+[B<-in file>]
+[B<-out file>]
+[B<-notext>]
+[B<-outdir dir>]
+[B<-infiles>]
+[B<-spkac file>]
+[B<-ss_cert file>]
+[B<-preserveDN>]
+[B<-noemailDN>]
+[B<-batch>]
+[B<-msie_hack>]
+[B<-extensions section>]
+[B<-extfile section>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+[B<-subj arg>]
+[B<-utf8>]
+[B<-multivalue-rdn>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<ca> command is a minimal CA application. It can be used
+to sign certificate requests in a variety of forms and generate
+CRLs it also maintains a text database of issued certificates
+and their status.
+
+The options descriptions will be divided into each purpose.
+
+=head1 CA OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-config filename>
+
+specifies the configuration file to use.
+
+=item B<-name section>
+
+specifies the configuration file section to use (overrides
+B<default_ca> in the B<ca> section).
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+an input filename containing a single certificate request to be
+signed by the CA.
+
+=item B<-ss_cert filename>
+
+a single self signed certificate to be signed by the CA.
+
+=item B<-spkac filename>
+
+a file containing a single Netscape signed public key and challenge
+and additional field values to be signed by the CA. See the B<SPKAC FORMAT>
+section for information on the required input and output format.
+
+=item B<-infiles>
+
+if present this should be the last option, all subsequent arguments
+are assumed to the the names of files containing certificate requests. 
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+the output file to output certificates to. The default is standard
+output. The certificate details will also be printed out to this
+file in PEM format (except that B<-spkac> outputs DER format).
+
+=item B<-outdir directory>
+
+the directory to output certificates to. The certificate will be
+written to a filename consisting of the serial number in hex with
+".pem" appended.
+
+=item B<-cert>
+
+the CA certificate file.
+
+=item B<-keyfile filename>
+
+the private key to sign requests with.
+
+=item B<-keyform PEM|DER>
+
+the format of the data in the private key file.
+The default is PEM.
+
+=item B<-key password>
+
+the password used to encrypt the private key. Since on some
+systems the command line arguments are visible (e.g. Unix with
+the 'ps' utility) this option should be used with caution.
+
+=item B<-selfsign>
+
+indicates the issued certificates are to be signed with the key
+the certificate requests were signed with (given with B<-keyfile>).
+Cerificate requests signed with a different key are ignored.  If
+B<-spkac>, B<-ss_cert> or B<-gencrl> are given, B<-selfsign> is
+ignored.
+
+A consequence of using B<-selfsign> is that the self-signed
+certificate appears among the entries in the certificate database
+(see the configuration option B<database>), and uses the same
+serial number counter as all other certificates sign with the
+self-signed certificate.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the key password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-verbose>
+
+this prints extra details about the operations being performed.
+
+=item B<-notext>
+
+don't output the text form of a certificate to the output file.
+
+=item B<-startdate date>
+
+this allows the start date to be explicitly set. The format of the
+date is YYMMDDHHMMSSZ (the same as an ASN1 UTCTime structure).
+
+=item B<-enddate date>
+
+this allows the expiry date to be explicitly set. The format of the
+date is YYMMDDHHMMSSZ (the same as an ASN1 UTCTime structure).
+
+=item B<-days arg>
+
+the number of days to certify the certificate for.
+
+=item B<-md alg>
+
+the message digest to use. Possible values include md5, sha1 and mdc2.
+This option also applies to CRLs.
+
+=item B<-policy arg>
+
+this option defines the CA "policy" to use. This is a section in
+the configuration file which decides which fields should be mandatory
+or match the CA certificate. Check out the B<POLICY FORMAT> section
+for more information.
+
+=item B<-msie_hack>
+
+this is a legacy option to make B<ca> work with very old versions of
+the IE certificate enrollment control "certenr3". It used UniversalStrings
+for almost everything. Since the old control has various security bugs
+its use is strongly discouraged. The newer control "Xenroll" does not
+need this option.
+
+=item B<-preserveDN>
+
+Normally the DN order of a certificate is the same as the order of the
+fields in the relevant policy section. When this option is set the order 
+is the same as the request. This is largely for compatibility with the
+older IE enrollment control which would only accept certificates if their
+DNs match the order of the request. This is not needed for Xenroll.
+
+=item B<-noemailDN>
+
+The DN of a certificate can contain the EMAIL field if present in the
+request DN, however it is good policy just having the e-mail set into
+the altName extension of the certificate. When this option is set the
+EMAIL field is removed from the certificate' subject and set only in
+the, eventually present, extensions. The B<email_in_dn> keyword can be
+used in the configuration file to enable this behaviour.
+
+=item B<-batch>
+
+this sets the batch mode. In this mode no questions will be asked
+and all certificates will be certified automatically.
+
+=item B<-extensions section>
+
+the section of the configuration file containing certificate extensions
+to be added when a certificate is issued (defaults to B<x509_extensions>
+unless the B<-extfile> option is used). If no extension section is
+present then, a V1 certificate is created. If the extension section
+is present (even if it is empty), then a V3 certificate is created. See the:w
+L<x509v3_config(5)|x509v3_config(5)> manual page for details of the
+extension section format.
+
+=item B<-extfile file>
+
+an additional configuration file to read certificate extensions from
+(using the default section unless the B<-extensions> option is also
+used).
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<ca>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=item B<-subj arg>
+
+supersedes subject name given in the request.
+The arg must be formatted as I</type0=value0/type1=value1/type2=...>,
+characters may be escaped by \ (backslash), no spaces are skipped.
+
+=item B<-utf8>
+
+this option causes field values to be interpreted as UTF8 strings, by 
+default they are interpreted as ASCII. This means that the field
+values, whether prompted from a terminal or obtained from a
+configuration file, must be valid UTF8 strings.
+
+=item B<-multivalue-rdn>
+
+this option causes the -subj argument to be interpretedt with full
+support for multivalued RDNs. Example:
+
+I</DC=org/DC=OpenSSL/DC=users/UID=123456+CN=John Doe>
+
+If -multi-rdn is not used then the UID value is I<123456+CN=John Doe>.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 CRL OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-gencrl>
+
+this option generates a CRL based on information in the index file.
+
+=item B<-crldays num>
+
+the number of days before the next CRL is due. That is the days from
+now to place in the CRL nextUpdate field.
+
+=item B<-crlhours num>
+
+the number of hours before the next CRL is due.
+
+=item B<-revoke filename>
+
+a filename containing a certificate to revoke.
+
+=item B<-status serial>
+
+displays the revocation status of the certificate with the specified
+serial number and exits.
+
+=item B<-updatedb>
+
+Updates the database index to purge expired certificates.
+
+=item B<-crl_reason reason>
+
+revocation reason, where B<reason> is one of: B<unspecified>, B<keyCompromise>,
+B<CACompromise>, B<affiliationChanged>, B<superseded>, B<cessationOfOperation>,
+B<certificateHold> or B<removeFromCRL>. The matching of B<reason> is case
+insensitive. Setting any revocation reason will make the CRL v2.
+
+In practive B<removeFromCRL> is not particularly useful because it is only used
+in delta CRLs which are not currently implemented.
+
+=item B<-crl_hold instruction>
+
+This sets the CRL revocation reason code to B<certificateHold> and the hold
+instruction to B<instruction> which must be an OID. Although any OID can be
+used only B<holdInstructionNone> (the use of which is discouraged by RFC2459)
+B<holdInstructionCallIssuer> or B<holdInstructionReject> will normally be used.
+
+=item B<-crl_compromise time>
+
+This sets the revocation reason to B<keyCompromise> and the compromise time to
+B<time>. B<time> should be in GeneralizedTime format that is B<YYYYMMDDHHMMSSZ>.
+
+=item B<-crl_CA_compromise time>
+
+This is the same as B<crl_compromise> except the revocation reason is set to
+B<CACompromise>.
+
+=item B<-crlexts section>
+
+the section of the configuration file containing CRL extensions to
+include. If no CRL extension section is present then a V1 CRL is
+created, if the CRL extension section is present (even if it is
+empty) then a V2 CRL is created. The CRL extensions specified are
+CRL extensions and B<not> CRL entry extensions.  It should be noted
+that some software (for example Netscape) can't handle V2 CRLs. See
+L<x509v3_config(5)|x509v3_config(5)> manual page for details of the
+extension section format.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
+
+The section of the configuration file containing options for B<ca>
+is found as follows: If the B<-name> command line option is used,
+then it names the section to be used. Otherwise the section to
+be used must be named in the B<default_ca> option of the B<ca> section
+of the configuration file (or in the default section of the
+configuration file). Besides B<default_ca>, the following options are
+read directly from the B<ca> section:
+ RANDFILE
+ preserve
+ msie_hack
+With the exception of B<RANDFILE>, this is probably a bug and may
+change in future releases.
+
+Many of the configuration file options are identical to command line
+options. Where the option is present in the configuration file
+and the command line the command line value is used. Where an
+option is described as mandatory then it must be present in
+the configuration file or the command line equivalent (if
+any) used.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<oid_file>
+
+This specifies a file containing additional B<OBJECT IDENTIFIERS>.
+Each line of the file should consist of the numerical form of the
+object identifier followed by white space then the short name followed
+by white space and finally the long name. 
+
+=item B<oid_section>
+
+This specifies a section in the configuration file containing extra
+object identifiers. Each line should consist of the short name of the
+object identifier followed by B<=> and the numerical form. The short
+and long names are the same when this option is used.
+
+=item B<new_certs_dir>
+
+the same as the B<-outdir> command line option. It specifies
+the directory where new certificates will be placed. Mandatory.
+
+=item B<certificate>
+
+the same as B<-cert>. It gives the file containing the CA
+certificate. Mandatory.
+
+=item B<private_key>
+
+same as the B<-keyfile> option. The file containing the
+CA private key. Mandatory.
+
+=item B<RANDFILE>
+
+a file used to read and write random number seed information, or
+an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+
+=item B<default_days>
+
+the same as the B<-days> option. The number of days to certify
+a certificate for. 
+
+=item B<default_startdate>
+
+the same as the B<-startdate> option. The start date to certify
+a certificate for. If not set the current time is used.
+
+=item B<default_enddate>
+
+the same as the B<-enddate> option. Either this option or
+B<default_days> (or the command line equivalents) must be
+present.
+
+=item B<default_crl_hours default_crl_days>
+
+the same as the B<-crlhours> and the B<-crldays> options. These
+will only be used if neither command line option is present. At
+least one of these must be present to generate a CRL.
+
+=item B<default_md>
+
+the same as the B<-md> option. The message digest to use. Mandatory.
+
+=item B<database>
+
+the text database file to use. Mandatory. This file must be present
+though initially it will be empty.
+
+=item B<unique_subject>
+
+if the value B<yes> is given, the valid certificate entries in the
+database must have unique subjects.  if the value B<no> is given,
+several valid certificate entries may have the exact same subject.
+The default value is B<yes>, to be compatible with older (pre 0.9.8)
+versions of OpenSSL.  However, to make CA certificate roll-over easier,
+it's recommended to use the value B<no>, especially if combined with
+the B<-selfsign> command line option.
+
+=item B<serial>
+
+a text file containing the next serial number to use in hex. Mandatory.
+This file must be present and contain a valid serial number.
+
+=item B<crlnumber>
+
+a text file containing the next CRL number to use in hex. The crl number
+will be inserted in the CRLs only if this file exists. If this file is
+present, it must contain a valid CRL number.
+
+=item B<x509_extensions>
+
+the same as B<-extensions>.
+
+=item B<crl_extensions>
+
+the same as B<-crlexts>.
+
+=item B<preserve>
+
+the same as B<-preserveDN>
+
+=item B<email_in_dn>
+
+the same as B<-noemailDN>. If you want the EMAIL field to be removed
+from the DN of the certificate simply set this to 'no'. If not present
+the default is to allow for the EMAIL filed in the certificate's DN.
+
+=item B<msie_hack>
+
+the same as B<-msie_hack>
+
+=item B<policy>
+
+the same as B<-policy>. Mandatory. See the B<POLICY FORMAT> section
+for more information.
+
+=item B<name_opt>, B<cert_opt>
+
+these options allow the format used to display the certificate details
+when asking the user to confirm signing. All the options supported by
+the B<x509> utilities B<-nameopt> and B<-certopt> switches can be used
+here, except the B<no_signame> and B<no_sigdump> are permanently set
+and cannot be disabled (this is because the certificate signature cannot
+be displayed because the certificate has not been signed at this point).
+
+For convenience the values B<ca_default> are accepted by both to produce
+a reasonable output.
+
+If neither option is present the format used in earlier versions of
+OpenSSL is used. Use of the old format is B<strongly> discouraged because
+it only displays fields mentioned in the B<policy> section, mishandles
+multicharacter string types and does not display extensions.
+
+=item B<copy_extensions>
+
+determines how extensions in certificate requests should be handled.
+If set to B<none> or this option is not present then extensions are
+ignored and not copied to the certificate. If set to B<copy> then any
+extensions present in the request that are not already present are copied
+to the certificate. If set to B<copyall> then all extensions in the
+request are copied to the certificate: if the extension is already present
+in the certificate it is deleted first. See the B<WARNINGS> section before
+using this option.
+
+The main use of this option is to allow a certificate request to supply
+values for certain extensions such as subjectAltName.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 POLICY FORMAT
+
+The policy section consists of a set of variables corresponding to
+certificate DN fields. If the value is "match" then the field value
+must match the same field in the CA certificate. If the value is
+"supplied" then it must be present. If the value is "optional" then
+it may be present. Any fields not mentioned in the policy section
+are silently deleted, unless the B<-preserveDN> option is set but
+this can be regarded more of a quirk than intended behaviour.
+
+=head1 SPKAC FORMAT
+
+The input to the B<-spkac> command line option is a Netscape
+signed public key and challenge. This will usually come from
+the B<KEYGEN> tag in an HTML form to create a new private key. 
+It is however possible to create SPKACs using the B<spkac> utility.
+
+The file should contain the variable SPKAC set to the value of
+the SPKAC and also the required DN components as name value pairs.
+If you need to include the same component twice then it can be
+preceded by a number and a '.'.
+
+When processing SPKAC format, the output is DER if the B<-out>
+flag is used, but PEM format if sending to stdout or the B<-outdir>
+flag is used.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Note: these examples assume that the B<ca> directory structure is
+already set up and the relevant files already exist. This usually
+involves creating a CA certificate and private key with B<req>, a
+serial number file and an empty index file and placing them in
+the relevant directories.
+
+To use the sample configuration file below the directories demoCA,
+demoCA/private and demoCA/newcerts would be created. The CA
+certificate would be copied to demoCA/cacert.pem and its private
+key to demoCA/private/cakey.pem. A file demoCA/serial would be
+created containing for example "01" and the empty index file
+demoCA/index.txt.
+
+
+Sign a certificate request:
+
+ openssl ca -in req.pem -out newcert.pem
+
+Sign a certificate request, using CA extensions:
+
+ openssl ca -in req.pem -extensions v3_ca -out newcert.pem
+
+Generate a CRL
+
+ openssl ca -gencrl -out crl.pem
+
+Sign several requests:
+
+ openssl ca -infiles req1.pem req2.pem req3.pem
+
+Certify a Netscape SPKAC:
+
+ openssl ca -spkac spkac.txt
+
+A sample SPKAC file (the SPKAC line has been truncated for clarity):
+
+ SPKAC=MIG0MGAwXDANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAANLADBIAkEAn7PDhCeV/xIxUg8V70YRxK2A5
+ CN=Steve Test
+ emailAddress=steve@openssl.org
+ 0.OU=OpenSSL Group
+ 1.OU=Another Group
+
+A sample configuration file with the relevant sections for B<ca>:
+
+ [ ca ]
+ default_ca      = CA_default            # The default ca section
+ 
+ [ CA_default ]
+
+ dir            = ./demoCA              # top dir
+ database       = $dir/index.txt        # index file.
+ new_certs_dir	= $dir/newcerts         # new certs dir
+ 
+ certificate    = $dir/cacert.pem       # The CA cert
+ serial         = $dir/serial           # serial no file
+ private_key    = $dir/private/cakey.pem# CA private key
+ RANDFILE       = $dir/private/.rand    # random number file
+ 
+ default_days   = 365                   # how long to certify for
+ default_crl_days= 30                   # how long before next CRL
+ default_md     = md5                   # md to use
+
+ policy         = policy_any            # default policy
+ email_in_dn    = no                    # Don't add the email into cert DN
+
+ name_opt	= ca_default		# Subject name display option
+ cert_opt	= ca_default		# Certificate display option
+ copy_extensions = none			# Don't copy extensions from request
+
+ [ policy_any ]
+ countryName            = supplied
+ stateOrProvinceName    = optional
+ organizationName       = optional
+ organizationalUnitName = optional
+ commonName             = supplied
+ emailAddress           = optional
+
+=head1 FILES
+
+Note: the location of all files can change either by compile time options,
+configuration file entries, environment variables or command line options.
+The values below reflect the default values.
+
+ /usr/local/ssl/lib/openssl.cnf - master configuration file
+ ./demoCA                       - main CA directory
+ ./demoCA/cacert.pem            - CA certificate
+ ./demoCA/private/cakey.pem     - CA private key
+ ./demoCA/serial                - CA serial number file
+ ./demoCA/serial.old            - CA serial number backup file
+ ./demoCA/index.txt             - CA text database file
+ ./demoCA/index.txt.old         - CA text database backup file
+ ./demoCA/certs                 - certificate output file
+ ./demoCA/.rnd                  - CA random seed information
+
+=head1 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+
+B<OPENSSL_CONF> reflects the location of master configuration file it can
+be overridden by the B<-config> command line option.
+
+=head1 RESTRICTIONS
+
+The text database index file is a critical part of the process and 
+if corrupted it can be difficult to fix. It is theoretically possible
+to rebuild the index file from all the issued certificates and a current
+CRL: however there is no option to do this.
+
+V2 CRL features like delta CRLs are not currently supported.
+
+Although several requests can be input and handled at once it is only
+possible to include one SPKAC or self signed certificate.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The use of an in memory text database can cause problems when large
+numbers of certificates are present because, as the name implies
+the database has to be kept in memory.
+
+The B<ca> command really needs rewriting or the required functionality
+exposed at either a command or interface level so a more friendly utility
+(perl script or GUI) can handle things properly. The scripts B<CA.sh> and
+B<CA.pl> help a little but not very much.
+
+Any fields in a request that are not present in a policy are silently
+deleted. This does not happen if the B<-preserveDN> option is used. To
+enforce the absence of the EMAIL field within the DN, as suggested by
+RFCs, regardless the contents of the request' subject the B<-noemailDN>
+option can be used. The behaviour should be more friendly and
+configurable.
+
+Cancelling some commands by refusing to certify a certificate can
+create an empty file.
+
+=head1 WARNINGS
+
+The B<ca> command is quirky and at times downright unfriendly.
+
+The B<ca> utility was originally meant as an example of how to do things
+in a CA. It was not supposed to be used as a full blown CA itself:
+nevertheless some people are using it for this purpose.
+
+The B<ca> command is effectively a single user command: no locking is
+done on the various files and attempts to run more than one B<ca> command
+on the same database can have unpredictable results.
+
+The B<copy_extensions> option should be used with caution. If care is
+not taken then it can be a security risk. For example if a certificate
+request contains a basicConstraints extension with CA:TRUE and the
+B<copy_extensions> value is set to B<copyall> and the user does not spot
+this when the certificate is displayed then this will hand the requestor
+a valid CA certificate.
+
+This situation can be avoided by setting B<copy_extensions> to B<copy>
+and including basicConstraints with CA:FALSE in the configuration file.
+Then if the request contains a basicConstraints extension it will be
+ignored.
+
+It is advisable to also include values for other extensions such
+as B<keyUsage> to prevent a request supplying its own values.
+
+Additional restrictions can be placed on the CA certificate itself.
+For example if the CA certificate has:
+
+ basicConstraints = CA:TRUE, pathlen:0
+
+then even if a certificate is issued with CA:TRUE it will not be valid.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<req(1)|req(1)>, L<spkac(1)|spkac(1)>, L<x509(1)|x509(1)>, L<CA.pl(1)|CA.pl(1)>,
+L<config(5)|config(5)>, L<x509v3_config(5)|x509v3_config(5)> 
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/ciphers.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/ciphers.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9224557
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/ciphers.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,645 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ciphers - SSL cipher display and cipher list tool.
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<ciphers>
+[B<-v>]
+[B<-V>]
+[B<-ssl2>]
+[B<-ssl3>]
+[B<-tls1>]
+[B<cipherlist>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<ciphers> command converts textual OpenSSL cipher lists into ordered
+SSL cipher preference lists. It can be used as a test tool to determine
+the appropriate cipherlist.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-v>
+
+Verbose option. List ciphers with a complete description of
+protocol version (SSLv2 or SSLv3; the latter includes TLS), key exchange,
+authentication, encryption and mac algorithms used along with any key size
+restrictions and whether the algorithm is classed as an "export" cipher.
+Note that without the B<-v> option, ciphers may seem to appear twice
+in a cipher list; this is when similar ciphers are available for
+SSL v2 and for SSL v3/TLS v1.
+
+=item B<-V>
+
+Like B<-v>, but include cipher suite codes in output (hex format).
+
+=item B<-ssl3>, B<-tls1>
+
+This lists ciphers compatible with any of SSLv3, TLSv1, TLSv1.1 or TLSv1.2.
+
+=item B<-ssl2>
+
+Only include SSLv2 ciphers.
+
+=item B<-h>, B<-?>
+
+Print a brief usage message.
+
+=item B<cipherlist>
+
+A cipher list to convert to a cipher preference list. If it is not included
+then the default cipher list will be used. The format is described below.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 CIPHER LIST FORMAT
+
+The cipher list consists of one or more I<cipher strings> separated by colons.
+Commas or spaces are also acceptable separators but colons are normally used.
+
+The actual cipher string can take several different forms.
+
+It can consist of a single cipher suite such as B<RC4-SHA>.
+
+It can represent a list of cipher suites containing a certain algorithm, or
+cipher suites of a certain type. For example B<SHA1> represents all ciphers
+suites using the digest algorithm SHA1 and B<SSLv3> represents all SSL v3
+algorithms.
+
+Lists of cipher suites can be combined in a single cipher string using the
+B<+> character. This is used as a logical B<and> operation. For example
+B<SHA1+DES> represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 B<and> the DES
+algorithms.
+
+Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters B<!>,
+B<-> or B<+>.
+
+If B<!> is used then the ciphers are permanently deleted from the list.
+The ciphers deleted can never reappear in the list even if they are
+explicitly stated.
+
+If B<-> is used then the ciphers are deleted from the list, but some or
+all of the ciphers can be added again by later options.
+
+If B<+> is used then the ciphers are moved to the end of the list. This
+option doesn't add any new ciphers it just moves matching existing ones.
+
+If none of these characters is present then the string is just interpreted
+as a list of ciphers to be appended to the current preference list. If the
+list includes any ciphers already present they will be ignored: that is they
+will not moved to the end of the list.
+
+Additionally the cipher string B<@STRENGTH> can be used at any point to sort
+the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length.
+
+=head1 CIPHER STRINGS
+
+The following is a list of all permitted cipher strings and their meanings.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<DEFAULT>
+
+The default cipher list.
+This is determined at compile time and is normally
+B<ALL:!EXPORT:!LOW:!aNULL:!eNULL:!SSLv2>.
+When used, this must be the first cipherstring specified.
+
+=item B<COMPLEMENTOFDEFAULT>
+
+the ciphers included in B<ALL>, but not enabled by default. Currently
+this is B<ADH> and B<AECDH>. Note that this rule does not cover B<eNULL>,
+which is not included by B<ALL> (use B<COMPLEMENTOFALL> if necessary).
+
+=item B<ALL>
+
+all cipher suites except the B<eNULL> ciphers which must be explicitly enabled;
+as of OpenSSL, the B<ALL> cipher suites are reasonably ordered by default
+
+=item B<COMPLEMENTOFALL>
+
+the cipher suites not enabled by B<ALL>, currently being B<eNULL>.
+
+=item B<HIGH>
+
+"high" encryption cipher suites. This currently means those with key lengths larger
+than 128 bits, and some cipher suites with 128-bit keys.
+
+=item B<MEDIUM>
+
+"medium" encryption cipher suites, currently some of those using 128 bit encryption.
+
+=item B<LOW>
+
+Low strength encryption cipher suites, currently those using 64 or 56 bit
+encryption algorithms but excluding export cipher suites.
+As of OpenSSL 1.0.2g, these are disabled in default builds.
+
+=item B<EXP>, B<EXPORT>
+
+Export strength encryption algorithms. Including 40 and 56 bits algorithms.
+As of OpenSSL 1.0.2g, these are disabled in default builds.
+
+=item B<EXPORT40>
+
+40-bit export encryption algorithms
+As of OpenSSL 1.0.2g, these are disabled in default builds.
+
+=item B<EXPORT56>
+
+56-bit export encryption algorithms. In OpenSSL 0.9.8c and later the set of
+56 bit export ciphers is empty unless OpenSSL has been explicitly configured
+with support for experimental ciphers.
+As of OpenSSL 1.0.2g, these are disabled in default builds.
+
+=item B<eNULL>, B<NULL>
+
+The "NULL" ciphers that is those offering no encryption. Because these offer no
+encryption at all and are a security risk they are not enabled via either the
+B<DEFAULT> or B<ALL> cipher strings.
+Be careful when building cipherlists out of lower-level primitives such as
+B<kRSA> or B<aECDSA> as these do overlap with the B<eNULL> ciphers.
+When in doubt, include B<!eNULL> in your cipherlist.
+
+=item B<aNULL>
+
+The cipher suites offering no authentication. This is currently the anonymous
+DH algorithms and anonymous ECDH algorithms. These cipher suites are vulnerable
+to a "man in the middle" attack and so their use is normally discouraged.
+These are excluded from the B<DEFAULT> ciphers, but included in the B<ALL>
+ciphers.
+Be careful when building cipherlists out of lower-level primitives such as
+B<kDHE> or B<AES> as these do overlap with the B<aNULL> ciphers.
+When in doubt, include B<!aNULL> in your cipherlist.
+
+=item B<kRSA>, B<RSA>
+
+cipher suites using RSA key exchange.
+
+=item B<kDHr>, B<kDHd>, B<kDH>
+
+cipher suites using DH key agreement and DH certificates signed by CAs with RSA
+and DSS keys or either respectively.
+
+=item B<kDHE>, B<kEDH>
+
+cipher suites using ephemeral DH key agreement, including anonymous cipher
+suites.
+
+=item B<DHE>, B<EDH>
+
+cipher suites using authenticated ephemeral DH key agreement.
+
+=item B<ADH>
+
+anonymous DH cipher suites, note that this does not include anonymous Elliptic
+Curve DH (ECDH) cipher suites.
+
+=item B<DH>
+
+cipher suites using DH, including anonymous DH, ephemeral DH and fixed DH.
+
+=item B<kECDHr>, B<kECDHe>, B<kECDH>
+
+cipher suites using fixed ECDH key agreement signed by CAs with RSA and ECDSA
+keys or either respectively.
+
+=item B<kECDHE>, B<kEECDH>
+
+cipher suites using ephemeral ECDH key agreement, including anonymous
+cipher suites.
+
+=item B<ECDHE>, B<EECDH>
+
+cipher suites using authenticated ephemeral ECDH key agreement.
+
+=item B<AECDH>
+
+anonymous Elliptic Curve Diffie Hellman cipher suites.
+
+=item B<ECDH>
+
+cipher suites using ECDH key exchange, including anonymous, ephemeral and
+fixed ECDH.
+
+=item B<aRSA>
+
+cipher suites using RSA authentication, i.e. the certificates carry RSA keys.
+
+=item B<aDSS>, B<DSS>
+
+cipher suites using DSS authentication, i.e. the certificates carry DSS keys.
+
+=item B<aDH>
+
+cipher suites effectively using DH authentication, i.e. the certificates carry
+DH keys.
+
+=item B<aECDH>
+
+cipher suites effectively using ECDH authentication, i.e. the certificates
+carry ECDH keys.
+
+=item B<aECDSA>, B<ECDSA>
+
+cipher suites using ECDSA authentication, i.e. the certificates carry ECDSA
+keys.
+
+=item B<kFZA>, B<aFZA>, B<eFZA>, B<FZA>
+
+ciphers suites using FORTEZZA key exchange, authentication, encryption or all
+FORTEZZA algorithms. Not implemented.
+
+=item B<TLSv1.2>, B<TLSv1>, B<SSLv3>, B<SSLv2>
+
+TLS v1.2, TLS v1.0, SSL v3.0 or SSL v2.0 cipher suites respectively. Note:
+there are no ciphersuites specific to TLS v1.1.
+
+=item B<AES128>, B<AES256>, B<AES>
+
+cipher suites using 128 bit AES, 256 bit AES or either 128 or 256 bit AES.
+
+=item B<AESGCM>
+
+AES in Galois Counter Mode (GCM): these ciphersuites are only supported
+in TLS v1.2.
+
+=item B<CAMELLIA128>, B<CAMELLIA256>, B<CAMELLIA>
+
+cipher suites using 128 bit CAMELLIA, 256 bit CAMELLIA or either 128 or 256 bit
+CAMELLIA.
+
+=item B<3DES>
+
+cipher suites using triple DES.
+
+=item B<DES>
+
+cipher suites using DES (not triple DES).
+
+=item B<RC4>
+
+cipher suites using RC4.
+
+=item B<RC2>
+
+cipher suites using RC2.
+
+=item B<IDEA>
+
+cipher suites using IDEA.
+
+=item B<SEED>
+
+cipher suites using SEED.
+
+=item B<MD5>
+
+cipher suites using MD5.
+
+=item B<SHA1>, B<SHA>
+
+cipher suites using SHA1.
+
+=item B<SHA256>, B<SHA384>
+
+ciphersuites using SHA256 or SHA384.
+
+=item B<aGOST> 
+
+cipher suites using GOST R 34.10 (either 2001 or 94) for authenticaction
+(needs an engine supporting GOST algorithms). 
+
+=item B<aGOST01>
+
+cipher suites using GOST R 34.10-2001 authentication.
+
+=item B<aGOST94>
+
+cipher suites using GOST R 34.10-94 authentication (note that R 34.10-94
+standard has been expired so use GOST R 34.10-2001)
+
+=item B<kGOST>
+
+cipher suites, using VKO 34.10 key exchange, specified in the RFC 4357.
+
+=item B<GOST94>
+
+cipher suites, using HMAC based on GOST R 34.11-94.
+
+=item B<GOST89MAC>
+
+cipher suites using GOST 28147-89 MAC B<instead of> HMAC.
+
+=item B<PSK>
+
+cipher suites using pre-shared keys (PSK).
+
+=item B<SUITEB128>, B<SUITEB128ONLY>, B<SUITEB192>
+
+enables suite B mode operation using 128 (permitting 192 bit mode by peer)
+128 bit (not permitting 192 bit by peer) or 192 bit level of security
+respectively. If used these cipherstrings should appear first in the cipher
+list and anything after them is ignored. Setting Suite B mode has additional
+consequences required to comply with RFC6460. In particular the supported
+signature algorithms is reduced to support only ECDSA and SHA256 or SHA384,
+only the elliptic curves P-256 and P-384 can be used and only the two suite B
+compliant ciphersuites (ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256 and
+ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384) are permissible.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 CIPHER SUITE NAMES
+
+The following lists give the SSL or TLS cipher suites names from the
+relevant specification and their OpenSSL equivalents. It should be noted,
+that several cipher suite names do not include the authentication used,
+e.g. DES-CBC3-SHA. In these cases, RSA authentication is used.
+
+=head2 SSL v3.0 cipher suites.
+
+ SSL_RSA_WITH_NULL_MD5                   NULL-MD5
+ SSL_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA                   NULL-SHA
+ SSL_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5          EXP-RC4-MD5
+ SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5                RC4-MD5
+ SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA                RC4-SHA
+ SSL_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC2_CBC_40_MD5      EXP-RC2-CBC-MD5
+ SSL_RSA_WITH_IDEA_CBC_SHA               IDEA-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA       EXP-DES-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA                DES-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA           DES-CBC3-SHA
+
+ SSL_DH_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA             DH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_DH_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA        DH-DSS-DES-CBC3-SHA
+ SSL_DH_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA             DH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_DH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA        DH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA
+ SSL_DHE_DSS_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA   EXP-EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA            EDH-DSS-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA       EDH-DSS-DES-CBC3-SHA
+ SSL_DHE_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA   EXP-EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA            EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA       EDH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA
+
+ SSL_DH_anon_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5      EXP-ADH-RC4-MD5
+ SSL_DH_anon_WITH_RC4_128_MD5            ADH-RC4-MD5
+ SSL_DH_anon_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA   EXP-ADH-DES-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_DH_anon_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA            ADH-DES-CBC-SHA
+ SSL_DH_anon_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA       ADH-DES-CBC3-SHA
+
+ SSL_FORTEZZA_KEA_WITH_NULL_SHA          Not implemented.
+ SSL_FORTEZZA_KEA_WITH_FORTEZZA_CBC_SHA  Not implemented.
+ SSL_FORTEZZA_KEA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA       Not implemented.
+
+=head2 TLS v1.0 cipher suites.
+
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_MD5                   NULL-MD5
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA                   NULL-SHA
+ TLS_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5          EXP-RC4-MD5
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5                RC4-MD5
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA                RC4-SHA
+ TLS_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC2_CBC_40_MD5      EXP-RC2-CBC-MD5
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_IDEA_CBC_SHA               IDEA-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA       EXP-DES-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA                DES-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA           DES-CBC3-SHA
+
+ TLS_DH_DSS_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA    Not implemented.
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA             Not implemented.
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA        Not implemented.
+ TLS_DH_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA    Not implemented.
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA             Not implemented.
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA        Not implemented.
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA   EXP-EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA            EDH-DSS-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA       EDH-DSS-DES-CBC3-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA   EXP-EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA            EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA       EDH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA
+
+ TLS_DH_anon_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5      EXP-ADH-RC4-MD5
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_RC4_128_MD5            ADH-RC4-MD5
+ TLS_DH_anon_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA   EXP-ADH-DES-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA            ADH-DES-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA       ADH-DES-CBC3-SHA
+
+=head2 AES ciphersuites from RFC3268, extending TLS v1.0
+
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA            AES128-SHA
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA            AES256-SHA
+
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA         DH-DSS-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA         DH-DSS-AES256-SHA
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA         DH-RSA-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA         DH-RSA-AES256-SHA
+
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA        DHE-DSS-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA        DHE-DSS-AES256-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA        DHE-RSA-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA        DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA
+
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA        ADH-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA        ADH-AES256-SHA
+
+=head2 Camellia ciphersuites from RFC4132, extending TLS v1.0
+
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA      CAMELLIA128-SHA
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA      CAMELLIA256-SHA
+
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA   DH-DSS-CAMELLIA128-SHA
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA   DH-DSS-CAMELLIA256-SHA
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA   DH-RSA-CAMELLIA128-SHA
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA   DH-RSA-CAMELLIA256-SHA
+
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA  DHE-DSS-CAMELLIA128-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA  DHE-DSS-CAMELLIA256-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA  DHE-RSA-CAMELLIA128-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA  DHE-RSA-CAMELLIA256-SHA
+
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA  ADH-CAMELLIA128-SHA
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA  ADH-CAMELLIA256-SHA
+
+=head2 SEED ciphersuites from RFC4162, extending TLS v1.0
+
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_SEED_CBC_SHA              SEED-SHA
+
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_SEED_CBC_SHA           DH-DSS-SEED-SHA
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_SEED_CBC_SHA           DH-RSA-SEED-SHA
+
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_SEED_CBC_SHA          DHE-DSS-SEED-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_SEED_CBC_SHA          DHE-RSA-SEED-SHA
+
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_SEED_CBC_SHA          ADH-SEED-SHA
+
+=head2 GOST ciphersuites from draft-chudov-cryptopro-cptls, extending TLS v1.0
+
+Note: these ciphers require an engine which including GOST cryptographic
+algorithms, such as the B<ccgost> engine, included in the OpenSSL distribution.
+
+ TLS_GOSTR341094_WITH_28147_CNT_IMIT GOST94-GOST89-GOST89
+ TLS_GOSTR341001_WITH_28147_CNT_IMIT GOST2001-GOST89-GOST89
+ TLS_GOSTR341094_WITH_NULL_GOSTR3411 GOST94-NULL-GOST94
+ TLS_GOSTR341001_WITH_NULL_GOSTR3411 GOST2001-NULL-GOST94
+
+=head2 Additional Export 1024 and other cipher suites
+
+Note: these ciphers can also be used in SSL v3.
+
+ TLS_RSA_EXPORT1024_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA     EXP1024-DES-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_RSA_EXPORT1024_WITH_RC4_56_SHA      EXP1024-RC4-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_EXPORT1024_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA EXP1024-DHE-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_EXPORT1024_WITH_RC4_56_SHA  EXP1024-DHE-DSS-RC4-SHA
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_RC4_128_SHA            DHE-DSS-RC4-SHA
+
+=head2 Elliptic curve cipher suites.
+
+ TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA              ECDH-RSA-NULL-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA           ECDH-RSA-RC4-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA      ECDH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA       ECDH-RSA-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA       ECDH-RSA-AES256-SHA
+
+ TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_NULL_SHA            ECDH-ECDSA-NULL-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA         ECDH-ECDSA-RC4-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA    ECDH-ECDSA-DES-CBC3-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA     ECDH-ECDSA-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA     ECDH-ECDSA-AES256-SHA
+
+ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA             ECDHE-RSA-NULL-SHA
+ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA          ECDHE-RSA-RC4-SHA
+ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA     ECDHE-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA
+ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA      ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA      ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA
+
+ TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_NULL_SHA           ECDHE-ECDSA-NULL-SHA
+ TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA        ECDHE-ECDSA-RC4-SHA
+ TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA   ECDHE-ECDSA-DES-CBC3-SHA
+ TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA    ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA    ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA
+
+ TLS_ECDH_anon_WITH_NULL_SHA             AECDH-NULL-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_anon_WITH_RC4_128_SHA          AECDH-RC4-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_anon_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA     AECDH-DES-CBC3-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_anon_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA      AECDH-AES128-SHA
+ TLS_ECDH_anon_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA      AECDH-AES256-SHA
+
+=head2 TLS v1.2 cipher suites
+
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA256                  NULL-SHA256
+
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256           AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256           AES256-SHA256
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256           AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384           AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256        DH-RSA-AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256        DH-RSA-AES256-SHA256
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256        DH-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384        DH-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256        DH-DSS-AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256        DH-DSS-AES256-SHA256
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256        DH-DSS-AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384        DH-DSS-AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256       DHE-RSA-AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256       DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA256
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256       DHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384       DHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256       DHE-DSS-AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256       DHE-DSS-AES256-SHA256
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256       DHE-DSS-AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384       DHE-DSS-AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+ TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256      ECDH-RSA-AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384      ECDH-RSA-AES256-SHA384
+ TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256      ECDH-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384      ECDH-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+ TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256    ECDH-ECDSA-AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384    ECDH-ECDSA-AES256-SHA384
+ TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256    ECDH-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384    ECDH-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256     ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384     ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA384
+ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256     ECDHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384     ECDHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+ TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256   ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384   ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA384
+ TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256   ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384   ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256       ADH-AES128-SHA256
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256       ADH-AES256-SHA256
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256       ADH-AES128-GCM-SHA256
+ TLS_DH_anon_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384       ADH-AES256-GCM-SHA384
+
+=head2 Pre shared keying (PSK) cipheruites
+
+ TLS_PSK_WITH_RC4_128_SHA                  PSK-RC4-SHA
+ TLS_PSK_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA             PSK-3DES-EDE-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA              PSK-AES128-CBC-SHA
+ TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA              PSK-AES256-CBC-SHA
+
+=head2 Deprecated SSL v2.0 cipher suites.
+
+ SSL_CK_RC4_128_WITH_MD5                 RC4-MD5
+ SSL_CK_RC4_128_EXPORT40_WITH_MD5        Not implemented.
+ SSL_CK_RC2_128_CBC_WITH_MD5             RC2-CBC-MD5
+ SSL_CK_RC2_128_CBC_EXPORT40_WITH_MD5    Not implemented.
+ SSL_CK_IDEA_128_CBC_WITH_MD5            IDEA-CBC-MD5
+ SSL_CK_DES_64_CBC_WITH_MD5              Not implemented.
+ SSL_CK_DES_192_EDE3_CBC_WITH_MD5        DES-CBC3-MD5
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Some compiled versions of OpenSSL may not include all the ciphers
+listed here because some ciphers were excluded at compile time.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Verbose listing of all OpenSSL ciphers including NULL ciphers:
+
+ openssl ciphers -v 'ALL:eNULL'
+
+Include all ciphers except NULL and anonymous DH then sort by
+strength:
+
+ openssl ciphers -v 'ALL:!ADH:@STRENGTH'
+
+Include all ciphers except ones with no encryption (eNULL) or no
+authentication (aNULL):
+
+ openssl ciphers -v 'ALL:!aNULL'
+
+Include only 3DES ciphers and then place RSA ciphers last:
+
+ openssl ciphers -v '3DES:+RSA'
+
+Include all RC4 ciphers but leave out those without authentication:
+
+ openssl ciphers -v 'RC4:!COMPLEMENTOFDEFAULT'
+
+Include all chiphers with RSA authentication but leave out ciphers without
+encryption.
+
+ openssl ciphers -v 'RSA:!COMPLEMENTOFALL'
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<s_client(1)|s_client(1)>, L<s_server(1)|s_server(1)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The B<COMPLENTOFALL> and B<COMPLEMENTOFDEFAULT> selection options
+for cipherlist strings were added in OpenSSL 0.9.7.
+The B<-V> option for the B<ciphers> command was added in OpenSSL 1.0.0.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/cms.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/cms.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac69804
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/cms.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,664 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+cms - CMS utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<cms>
+[B<-encrypt>]
+[B<-decrypt>]
+[B<-sign>]
+[B<-verify>]
+[B<-cmsout>]
+[B<-resign>]
+[B<-data_create>]
+[B<-data_out>]
+[B<-digest_create>]
+[B<-digest_verify>]
+[B<-compress>]
+[B<-uncompress>]
+[B<-EncryptedData_encrypt>]
+[B<-sign_receipt>]
+[B<-verify_receipt receipt>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-inform SMIME|PEM|DER>]
+[B<-rctform SMIME|PEM|DER>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-outform SMIME|PEM|DER>]
+[B<-stream -indef -noindef>]
+[B<-noindef>]
+[B<-content filename>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-print>]
+[B<-CAfile file>]
+[B<-CApath dir>]
+[B<-no_alt_chains>]
+[B<-md digest>]
+[B<-[cipher]>]
+[B<-nointern>]
+[B<-no_signer_cert_verify>]
+[B<-nocerts>]
+[B<-noattr>]
+[B<-nosmimecap>]
+[B<-binary>]
+[B<-nodetach>]
+[B<-certfile file>]
+[B<-certsout file>]
+[B<-signer file>]
+[B<-recip file>]
+[B<-keyid>]
+[B<-receipt_request_all -receipt_request_first>]
+[B<-receipt_request_from emailaddress>]
+[B<-receipt_request_to emailaddress>]
+[B<-receipt_request_print>]
+[B<-secretkey key>]
+[B<-secretkeyid id>]
+[B<-econtent_type type>]
+[B<-inkey file>]
+[B<-keyopt name:parameter>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<cert.pem...>]
+[B<-to addr>]
+[B<-from addr>]
+[B<-subject subj>]
+[cert.pem]...
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<cms> command handles S/MIME v3.1 mail. It can encrypt, decrypt, sign and
+verify, compress and uncompress S/MIME messages.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+There are fourteen operation options that set the type of operation to be
+performed. The meaning of the other options varies according to the operation
+type.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-encrypt>
+
+encrypt mail for the given recipient certificates. Input file is the message
+to be encrypted. The output file is the encrypted mail in MIME format. The
+actual CMS type is <B>EnvelopedData<B>.
+
+Note that no revocation check is done for the recipient cert, so if that
+key has been compromised, others may be able to decrypt the text.
+
+=item B<-decrypt>
+
+decrypt mail using the supplied certificate and private key. Expects an
+encrypted mail message in MIME format for the input file. The decrypted mail
+is written to the output file.
+
+=item B<-debug_decrypt>
+
+this option sets the B<CMS_DEBUG_DECRYPT> flag. This option should be used
+with caution: see the notes section below.
+
+=item B<-sign>
+
+sign mail using the supplied certificate and private key. Input file is
+the message to be signed. The signed message in MIME format is written
+to the output file.
+
+=item B<-verify>
+
+verify signed mail. Expects a signed mail message on input and outputs
+the signed data. Both clear text and opaque signing is supported.
+
+=item B<-cmsout>
+
+takes an input message and writes out a PEM encoded CMS structure.
+
+=item B<-resign>
+
+resign a message: take an existing message and one or more new signers.
+
+=item B<-data_create>
+
+Create a CMS B<Data> type.
+
+=item B<-data_out>
+
+B<Data> type and output the content.
+
+=item B<-digest_create>
+
+Create a CMS B<DigestedData> type.
+
+=item B<-digest_verify>
+
+Verify a CMS B<DigestedData> type and output the content.
+
+=item B<-compress>
+
+Create a CMS B<CompressedData> type. OpenSSL must be compiled with B<zlib>
+support for this option to work, otherwise it will output an error.
+
+=item B<-uncompress>
+
+Uncompress a CMS B<CompressedData> type and output the content. OpenSSL must be
+compiled with B<zlib> support for this option to work, otherwise it will
+output an error.
+
+=item B<-EncryptedData_encrypt>
+
+Encrypt content using supplied symmetric key and algorithm using a CMS
+B<EncrytedData> type and output the content.
+
+=item B<-sign_receipt>
+
+Generate and output a signed receipt for the supplied message. The input 
+message B<must> contain a signed receipt request. Functionality is otherwise
+similar to the B<-sign> operation.
+
+=item B<-verify_receipt receipt>
+
+Verify a signed receipt in filename B<receipt>. The input message B<must> 
+contain the original receipt request. Functionality is otherwise similar
+to the B<-verify> operation.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+the input message to be encrypted or signed or the message to be decrypted
+or verified.
+
+=item B<-inform SMIME|PEM|DER>
+
+this specifies the input format for the CMS structure. The default
+is B<SMIME> which reads an S/MIME format message. B<PEM> and B<DER>
+format change this to expect PEM and DER format CMS structures
+instead. This currently only affects the input format of the CMS
+structure, if no CMS structure is being input (for example with
+B<-encrypt> or B<-sign>) this option has no effect.
+
+=item B<-rctform SMIME|PEM|DER>
+
+specify the format for a signed receipt for use with the B<-receipt_verify>
+operation.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+the message text that has been decrypted or verified or the output MIME
+format message that has been signed or verified.
+
+=item B<-outform SMIME|PEM|DER>
+
+this specifies the output format for the CMS structure. The default
+is B<SMIME> which writes an S/MIME format message. B<PEM> and B<DER>
+format change this to write PEM and DER format CMS structures
+instead. This currently only affects the output format of the CMS
+structure, if no CMS structure is being output (for example with
+B<-verify> or B<-decrypt>) this option has no effect.
+
+=item B<-stream -indef -noindef>
+
+the B<-stream> and B<-indef> options are equivalent and enable streaming I/O
+for encoding operations. This permits single pass processing of data without
+the need to hold the entire contents in memory, potentially supporting very
+large files. Streaming is automatically set for S/MIME signing with detached
+data if the output format is B<SMIME> it is currently off by default for all
+other operations.
+
+=item B<-noindef>
+
+disable streaming I/O where it would produce and indefinite length constructed
+encoding. This option currently has no effect. In future streaming will be
+enabled by default on all relevant operations and this option will disable it.
+
+=item B<-content filename>
+
+This specifies a file containing the detached content, this is only
+useful with the B<-verify> command. This is only usable if the CMS
+structure is using the detached signature form where the content is
+not included. This option will override any content if the input format
+is S/MIME and it uses the multipart/signed MIME content type.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+this option adds plain text (text/plain) MIME headers to the supplied
+message if encrypting or signing. If decrypting or verifying it strips
+off text headers: if the decrypted or verified message is not of MIME 
+type text/plain then an error occurs.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+for the B<-cmsout> operation do not output the parsed CMS structure. This
+is useful when combined with the B<-print> option or if the syntax of the CMS
+structure is being checked.
+
+=item B<-print>
+
+for the B<-cmsout> operation print out all fields of the CMS structure. This
+is mainly useful for testing purposes.
+
+=item B<-CAfile file>
+
+a file containing trusted CA certificates, only used with B<-verify>.
+
+=item B<-CApath dir>
+
+a directory containing trusted CA certificates, only used with
+B<-verify>. This directory must be a standard certificate directory: that
+is a hash of each subject name (using B<x509 -hash>) should be linked
+to each certificate.
+
+=item B<-md digest>
+
+digest algorithm to use when signing or resigning. If not present then the
+default digest algorithm for the signing key will be used (usually SHA1).
+
+=item B<-[cipher]>
+
+the encryption algorithm to use. For example triple DES (168 bits) - B<-des3>
+or 256 bit AES - B<-aes256>. Any standard algorithm name (as used by the
+EVP_get_cipherbyname() function) can also be used preceded by a dash, for 
+example B<-aes_128_cbc>. See L<B<enc>|enc(1)> for a list of ciphers
+supported by your version of OpenSSL.
+
+If not specified triple DES is used. Only used with B<-encrypt> and 
+B<-EncryptedData_create> commands.
+
+=item B<-nointern>
+
+when verifying a message normally certificates (if any) included in
+the message are searched for the signing certificate. With this option
+only the certificates specified in the B<-certfile> option are used.
+The supplied certificates can still be used as untrusted CAs however.
+
+=item B<-no_signer_cert_verify>
+
+do not verify the signers certificate of a signed message.
+
+=item B<-nocerts>
+
+when signing a message the signer's certificate is normally included
+with this option it is excluded. This will reduce the size of the
+signed message but the verifier must have a copy of the signers certificate
+available locally (passed using the B<-certfile> option for example).
+
+=item B<-noattr>
+
+normally when a message is signed a set of attributes are included which
+include the signing time and supported symmetric algorithms. With this
+option they are not included.
+
+=item B<-nosmimecap>
+
+exclude the list of supported algorithms from signed attributes, other options
+such as signing time and content type are still included.
+
+=item B<-binary>
+
+normally the input message is converted to "canonical" format which is
+effectively using CR and LF as end of line: as required by the S/MIME
+specification. When this option is present no translation occurs. This
+is useful when handling binary data which may not be in MIME format.
+
+=item B<-nodetach>
+
+when signing a message use opaque signing: this form is more resistant
+to translation by mail relays but it cannot be read by mail agents that
+do not support S/MIME.  Without this option cleartext signing with
+the MIME type multipart/signed is used.
+
+=item B<-certfile file>
+
+allows additional certificates to be specified. When signing these will
+be included with the message. When verifying these will be searched for
+the signers certificates. The certificates should be in PEM format.
+
+=item B<-certsout file>
+
+any certificates contained in the message are written to B<file>.
+
+=item B<-signer file>
+
+a signing certificate when signing or resigning a message, this option can be
+used multiple times if more than one signer is required. If a message is being
+verified then the signers certificates will be written to this file if the
+verification was successful.
+
+=item B<-recip file>
+
+when decrypting a message this specifies the recipients certificate. The
+certificate must match one of the recipients of the message or an error
+occurs.
+
+When encrypting a message this option may be used multiple times to specify
+each recipient. This form B<must> be used if customised parameters are
+required (for example to specify RSA-OAEP).
+
+=item B<-keyid>
+
+use subject key identifier to identify certificates instead of issuer name and
+serial number. The supplied certificate B<must> include a subject key
+identifier extension. Supported by B<-sign> and B<-encrypt> options.
+
+=item B<-receipt_request_all -receipt_request_first>
+
+for B<-sign> option include a signed receipt request. Indicate requests should
+be provided by all receipient or first tier recipients (those mailed directly
+and not from a mailing list). Ignored it B<-receipt_request_from> is included.
+
+=item B<-receipt_request_from emailaddress>
+
+for B<-sign> option include a signed receipt request. Add an explicit email
+address where receipts should be supplied.
+
+=item B<-receipt_request_to emailaddress>
+
+Add an explicit email address where signed receipts should be sent to. This 
+option B<must> but supplied if a signed receipt it requested.
+
+=item B<-receipt_request_print>
+
+For the B<-verify> operation print out the contents of any signed receipt
+requests.
+
+=item B<-secretkey key>
+
+specify symmetric key to use. The key must be supplied in hex format and be
+consistent with the algorithm used. Supported by the B<-EncryptedData_encrypt>
+B<-EncrryptedData_decrypt>, B<-encrypt> and B<-decrypt> options. When used
+with B<-encrypt> or B<-decrypt> the supplied key is used to wrap or unwrap the
+content encryption key using an AES key in the B<KEKRecipientInfo> type.
+
+=item B<-secretkeyid id>
+
+the key identifier for the supplied symmetric key for B<KEKRecipientInfo> type.
+This option B<must> be present if the B<-secretkey> option is used with
+B<-encrypt>. With B<-decrypt> operations the B<id> is used to locate the
+relevant key if it is not supplied then an attempt is used to decrypt any
+B<KEKRecipientInfo> structures.
+
+=item B<-econtent_type type>
+
+set the encapsulated content type to B<type> if not supplied the B<Data> type
+is used. The B<type> argument can be any valid OID name in either text or
+numerical format. 
+
+=item B<-inkey file>
+
+the private key to use when signing or decrypting. This must match the
+corresponding certificate. If this option is not specified then the
+private key must be included in the certificate file specified with
+the B<-recip> or B<-signer> file. When signing this option can be used
+multiple times to specify successive keys.
+
+=item B<-keyopt name:opt>
+
+for signing and encryption this option can be used multiple times to
+set customised parameters for the preceding key or certificate. It can
+currently be used to set RSA-PSS for signing, RSA-OAEP for encryption
+or to modify default parameters for ECDH.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the private key password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<cert.pem...>
+
+one or more certificates of message recipients: used when encrypting
+a message. 
+
+=item B<-to, -from, -subject>
+
+the relevant mail headers. These are included outside the signed
+portion of a message so they may be included manually. If signing
+then many S/MIME mail clients check the signers certificate's email
+address matches that specified in the From: address.
+
+=item B<-purpose, -ignore_critical, -issuer_checks, -crl_check, -crl_check_all, -policy_check, -extended_crl, -x509_strict, -policy -check_ss_sig -no_alt_chains>
+
+Set various certificate chain valiadition option. See the
+L<B<verify>|verify(1)> manual page for details.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The MIME message must be sent without any blank lines between the
+headers and the output. Some mail programs will automatically add
+a blank line. Piping the mail directly to sendmail is one way to
+achieve the correct format.
+
+The supplied message to be signed or encrypted must include the
+necessary MIME headers or many S/MIME clients wont display it
+properly (if at all). You can use the B<-text> option to automatically
+add plain text headers.
+
+A "signed and encrypted" message is one where a signed message is
+then encrypted. This can be produced by encrypting an already signed
+message: see the examples section.
+
+This version of the program only allows one signer per message but it
+will verify multiple signers on received messages. Some S/MIME clients
+choke if a message contains multiple signers. It is possible to sign
+messages "in parallel" by signing an already signed message.
+
+The options B<-encrypt> and B<-decrypt> reflect common usage in S/MIME
+clients. Strictly speaking these process CMS enveloped data: CMS
+encrypted data is used for other purposes.
+
+The B<-resign> option uses an existing message digest when adding a new
+signer. This means that attributes must be present in at least one existing
+signer using the same message digest or this operation will fail.
+
+The B<-stream> and B<-indef> options enable experimental streaming I/O support.
+As a result the encoding is BER using indefinite length constructed encoding
+and no longer DER. Streaming is supported for the B<-encrypt> operation and the
+B<-sign> operation if the content is not detached.
+
+Streaming is always used for the B<-sign> operation with detached data but
+since the content is no longer part of the CMS structure the encoding
+remains DER.
+
+If the B<-decrypt> option is used without a recipient certificate then an
+attempt is made to locate the recipient by trying each potential recipient
+in turn using the supplied private key. To thwart the MMA attack
+(Bleichenbacher's attack on PKCS #1 v1.5 RSA padding) all recipients are
+tried whether they succeed or not and if no recipients match the message
+is "decrypted" using a random key which will typically output garbage. 
+The B<-debug_decrypt> option can be used to disable the MMA attack protection
+and return an error if no recipient can be found: this option should be used
+with caution. For a fuller description see L<CMS_decrypt(3)|CMS_decrypt(3)>).
+
+=head1 EXIT CODES
+
+=over 4
+
+=item Z<>0
+
+the operation was completely successfully.
+
+=item Z<>1
+
+an error occurred parsing the command options.
+
+=item Z<>2
+
+one of the input files could not be read.
+
+=item Z<>3
+
+an error occurred creating the CMS file or when reading the MIME
+message.
+
+=item Z<>4
+
+an error occurred decrypting or verifying the message.
+
+=item Z<>5
+
+the message was verified correctly but an error occurred writing out
+the signers certificates.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 COMPATIBILITY WITH PKCS#7 format.
+
+The B<smime> utility can only process the older B<PKCS#7> format. The B<cms>
+utility supports Cryptographic Message Syntax format. Use of some features
+will result in messages which cannot be processed by applications which only
+support the older format. These are detailed below.
+
+The use of the B<-keyid> option with B<-sign> or B<-encrypt>.
+
+The B<-outform PEM> option uses different headers.
+
+The B<-compress> option.
+
+The B<-secretkey> option when used with B<-encrypt>.
+
+The use of PSS with B<-sign>.
+
+The use of OAEP or non-RSA keys with B<-encrypt>.
+
+Additionally the B<-EncryptedData_create> and B<-data_create> type cannot
+be processed by the older B<smime> command.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Create a cleartext signed message:
+
+ openssl cms -sign -in message.txt -text -out mail.msg \
+	-signer mycert.pem
+
+Create an opaque signed message
+
+ openssl cms -sign -in message.txt -text -out mail.msg -nodetach \
+	-signer mycert.pem
+
+Create a signed message, include some additional certificates and
+read the private key from another file:
+
+ openssl cms -sign -in in.txt -text -out mail.msg \
+	-signer mycert.pem -inkey mykey.pem -certfile mycerts.pem
+
+Create a signed message with two signers, use key identifier:
+
+ openssl cms -sign -in message.txt -text -out mail.msg \
+	-signer mycert.pem -signer othercert.pem -keyid
+
+Send a signed message under Unix directly to sendmail, including headers:
+
+ openssl cms -sign -in in.txt -text -signer mycert.pem \
+	-from steve@openssl.org -to someone@somewhere \
+	-subject "Signed message" | sendmail someone@somewhere
+
+Verify a message and extract the signer's certificate if successful:
+
+ openssl cms -verify -in mail.msg -signer user.pem -out signedtext.txt
+
+Send encrypted mail using triple DES:
+
+ openssl cms -encrypt -in in.txt -from steve@openssl.org \
+	-to someone@somewhere -subject "Encrypted message" \
+	-des3 user.pem -out mail.msg
+
+Sign and encrypt mail:
+
+ openssl cms -sign -in ml.txt -signer my.pem -text \
+	| openssl cms -encrypt -out mail.msg \
+	-from steve@openssl.org -to someone@somewhere \
+	-subject "Signed and Encrypted message" -des3 user.pem
+
+Note: the encryption command does not include the B<-text> option because the
+message being encrypted already has MIME headers.
+
+Decrypt mail:
+
+ openssl cms -decrypt -in mail.msg -recip mycert.pem -inkey key.pem
+
+The output from Netscape form signing is a PKCS#7 structure with the
+detached signature format. You can use this program to verify the
+signature by line wrapping the base64 encoded structure and surrounding
+it with:
+
+ -----BEGIN PKCS7-----
+ -----END PKCS7-----
+
+and using the command, 
+
+ openssl cms -verify -inform PEM -in signature.pem -content content.txt
+
+alternatively you can base64 decode the signature and use
+
+ openssl cms -verify -inform DER -in signature.der -content content.txt
+
+Create an encrypted message using 128 bit Camellia:
+
+ openssl cms -encrypt -in plain.txt -camellia128 -out mail.msg cert.pem
+
+Add a signer to an existing message:
+
+ openssl cms -resign -in mail.msg -signer newsign.pem -out mail2.msg
+
+Sign mail using RSA-PSS:
+
+ openssl cms -sign -in message.txt -text -out mail.msg \
+	-signer mycert.pem -keyopt rsa_padding_mode:pss
+
+Create encrypted mail using RSA-OAEP:
+
+ openssl cms -encrypt -in plain.txt -out mail.msg \
+	-recip cert.pem -keyopt rsa_padding_mode:oaep
+
+Use SHA256 KDF with an ECDH certificate:
+
+ openssl cms -encrypt -in plain.txt -out mail.msg \
+	-recip ecdhcert.pem -keyopt ecdh_kdf_md:sha256
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The MIME parser isn't very clever: it seems to handle most messages that I've
+thrown at it but it may choke on others.
+
+The code currently will only write out the signer's certificate to a file: if
+the signer has a separate encryption certificate this must be manually
+extracted. There should be some heuristic that determines the correct
+encryption certificate.
+
+Ideally a database should be maintained of a certificates for each email
+address.
+
+The code doesn't currently take note of the permitted symmetric encryption
+algorithms as supplied in the SMIMECapabilities signed attribute. this means the
+user has to manually include the correct encryption algorithm. It should store
+the list of permitted ciphers in a database and only use those.
+
+No revocation checking is done on the signer's certificate.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The use of multiple B<-signer> options and the B<-resign> command were first
+added in OpenSSL 1.0.0
+
+The B<keyopt> option was first added in OpenSSL 1.1.0
+
+The use of B<-recip> to specify the recipient when encrypting mail was first
+added to OpenSSL 1.1.0
+
+Support for RSA-OAEP and RSA-PSS was first added to OpenSSL 1.1.0. 
+
+The use of non-RSA keys with B<-encrypt> and B<-decrypt> was first added
+to OpenSSL 1.1.0.
+
+The -no_alt_chains options was first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2b.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/config.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/config.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e125915
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/config.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,350 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=for comment openssl_manual_section:5
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+config - OpenSSL CONF library configuration files
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The OpenSSL CONF library can be used to read configuration files.
+It is used for the OpenSSL master configuration file B<openssl.cnf>
+and in a few other places like B<SPKAC> files and certificate extension
+files for the B<x509> utility. OpenSSL applications can also use the
+CONF library for their own purposes.
+
+A configuration file is divided into a number of sections. Each section
+starts with a line B<[ section_name ]> and ends when a new section is
+started or end of file is reached. A section name can consist of
+alphanumeric characters and underscores.
+
+The first section of a configuration file is special and is referred
+to as the B<default> section this is usually unnamed and is from the
+start of file until the first named section. When a name is being looked up
+it is first looked up in a named section (if any) and then the
+default section.
+
+The environment is mapped onto a section called B<ENV>.
+
+Comments can be included by preceding them with the B<#> character
+
+Each section in a configuration file consists of a number of name and
+value pairs of the form B<name=value>
+
+The B<name> string can contain any alphanumeric characters as well as
+a few punctuation symbols such as B<.> B<,> B<;> and B<_>.
+
+The B<value> string consists of the string following the B<=> character
+until end of line with any leading and trailing white space removed.
+
+The value string undergoes variable expansion. This can be done by
+including the form B<$var> or B<${var}>: this will substitute the value
+of the named variable in the current section. It is also possible to
+substitute a value from another section using the syntax B<$section::name>
+or B<${section::name}>. By using the form B<$ENV::name> environment
+variables can be substituted. It is also possible to assign values to
+environment variables by using the name B<ENV::name>, this will work
+if the program looks up environment variables using the B<CONF> library
+instead of calling B<getenv()> directly.
+
+It is possible to escape certain characters by using any kind of quote
+or the B<\> character. By making the last character of a line a B<\>
+a B<value> string can be spread across multiple lines. In addition
+the sequences B<\n>, B<\r>, B<\b> and B<\t> are recognized.
+
+=head1 OPENSSL LIBRARY CONFIGURATION
+
+In OpenSSL 0.9.7 and later applications can automatically configure certain
+aspects of OpenSSL using the master OpenSSL configuration file, or optionally
+an alternative configuration file. The B<openssl> utility includes this
+functionality: any sub command uses the master OpenSSL configuration file
+unless an option is used in the sub command to use an alternative configuration
+file.
+
+To enable library configuration the default section needs to contain an 
+appropriate line which points to the main configuration section. The default
+name is B<openssl_conf> which is used by the B<openssl> utility. Other
+applications may use an alternative name such as B<myapplicaton_conf>.
+
+The configuration section should consist of a set of name value pairs which
+contain specific module configuration information. The B<name> represents
+the name of the I<configuration module> the meaning of the B<value> is 
+module specific: it may, for example, represent a further configuration
+section containing configuration module specific information. E.g.
+
+ openssl_conf = openssl_init
+
+ [openssl_init]
+
+ oid_section = new_oids
+ engines = engine_section
+
+ [new_oids]
+
+ ... new oids here ...
+
+ [engine_section]
+
+ ... engine stuff here ...
+
+The features of each configuration module are described below.
+
+=head2 ASN1 OBJECT CONFIGURATION MODULE
+
+This module has the name B<oid_section>. The value of this variable points
+to a section containing name value pairs of OIDs: the name is the OID short
+and long name, the value is the numerical form of the OID. Although some of
+the B<openssl> utility sub commands already have their own ASN1 OBJECT section
+functionality not all do. By using the ASN1 OBJECT configuration module
+B<all> the B<openssl> utility sub commands can see the new objects as well
+as any compliant applications. For example:
+
+ [new_oids]
+ 
+ some_new_oid = 1.2.3.4
+ some_other_oid = 1.2.3.5
+
+In OpenSSL 0.9.8 it is also possible to set the value to the long name followed
+by a comma and the numerical OID form. For example:
+
+ shortName = some object long name, 1.2.3.4
+
+=head2 ENGINE CONFIGURATION MODULE
+
+This ENGINE configuration module has the name B<engines>. The value of this
+variable points to a section containing further ENGINE configuration
+information.
+
+The section pointed to by B<engines> is a table of engine names (though see
+B<engine_id> below) and further sections containing configuration information
+specific to each ENGINE.
+
+Each ENGINE specific section is used to set default algorithms, load
+dynamic, perform initialization and send ctrls. The actual operation performed
+depends on the I<command> name which is the name of the name value pair. The
+currently supported commands are listed below.
+
+For example:
+
+ [engine_section]
+
+ # Configure ENGINE named "foo"
+ foo = foo_section
+ # Configure ENGINE named "bar"
+ bar = bar_section
+
+ [foo_section]
+ ... foo ENGINE specific commands ...
+
+ [bar_section]
+ ... "bar" ENGINE specific commands ...
+
+The command B<engine_id> is used to give the ENGINE name. If used this 
+command must be first. For example:
+
+ [engine_section]
+ # This would normally handle an ENGINE named "foo"
+ foo = foo_section
+
+ [foo_section]
+ # Override default name and use "myfoo" instead.
+ engine_id = myfoo
+
+The command B<dynamic_path> loads and adds an ENGINE from the given path. It
+is equivalent to sending the ctrls B<SO_PATH> with the path argument followed
+by B<LIST_ADD> with value 2 and B<LOAD> to the dynamic ENGINE. If this is
+not the required behaviour then alternative ctrls can be sent directly
+to the dynamic ENGINE using ctrl commands.
+
+The command B<init> determines whether to initialize the ENGINE. If the value
+is B<0> the ENGINE will not be initialized, if B<1> and attempt it made to
+initialized the ENGINE immediately. If the B<init> command is not present
+then an attempt will be made to initialize the ENGINE after all commands in
+its section have been processed.
+
+The command B<default_algorithms> sets the default algorithms an ENGINE will
+supply using the functions B<ENGINE_set_default_string()>
+
+If the name matches none of the above command names it is assumed to be a
+ctrl command which is sent to the ENGINE. The value of the command is the 
+argument to the ctrl command. If the value is the string B<EMPTY> then no
+value is sent to the command.
+
+For example:
+
+
+ [engine_section]
+
+ # Configure ENGINE named "foo"
+ foo = foo_section
+
+ [foo_section]
+ # Load engine from DSO
+ dynamic_path = /some/path/fooengine.so
+ # A foo specific ctrl.
+ some_ctrl = some_value
+ # Another ctrl that doesn't take a value.
+ other_ctrl = EMPTY
+ # Supply all default algorithms
+ default_algorithms = ALL
+
+=head2 EVP CONFIGURATION MODULE
+
+This modules has the name B<alg_section> which points to a section containing
+algorithm commands.
+
+Currently the only algorithm command supported is B<fips_mode> whose
+value should be a boolean string such as B<on> or B<off>. If the value is
+B<on> this attempt to enter FIPS mode. If the call fails or the library is
+not FIPS capable then an error occurs.
+
+For example:
+
+ alg_section = evp_settings
+
+ [evp_settings]
+
+ fips_mode = on
+
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+If a configuration file attempts to expand a variable that doesn't exist
+then an error is flagged and the file will not load. This can happen
+if an attempt is made to expand an environment variable that doesn't
+exist. For example in a previous version of OpenSSL the default OpenSSL
+master configuration file used the value of B<HOME> which may not be
+defined on non Unix systems and would cause an error.
+
+This can be worked around by including a B<default> section to provide
+a default value: then if the environment lookup fails the default value
+will be used instead. For this to work properly the default value must
+be defined earlier in the configuration file than the expansion. See
+the B<EXAMPLES> section for an example of how to do this.
+
+If the same variable exists in the same section then all but the last
+value will be silently ignored. In certain circumstances such as with
+DNs the same field may occur multiple times. This is usually worked
+around by ignoring any characters before an initial B<.> e.g.
+
+ 1.OU="My first OU"
+ 2.OU="My Second OU"
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Here is a sample configuration file using some of the features
+mentioned above.
+
+ # This is the default section.
+ 
+ HOME=/temp
+ RANDFILE= ${ENV::HOME}/.rnd
+ configdir=$ENV::HOME/config
+
+ [ section_one ]
+
+ # We are now in section one.
+
+ # Quotes permit leading and trailing whitespace
+ any = " any variable name "
+
+ other = A string that can \
+ cover several lines \
+ by including \\ characters
+
+ message = Hello World\n
+
+ [ section_two ]
+
+ greeting = $section_one::message
+
+This next example shows how to expand environment variables safely.
+
+Suppose you want a variable called B<tmpfile> to refer to a
+temporary filename. The directory it is placed in can determined by
+the the B<TEMP> or B<TMP> environment variables but they may not be
+set to any value at all. If you just include the environment variable
+names and the variable doesn't exist then this will cause an error when
+an attempt is made to load the configuration file. By making use of the
+default section both values can be looked up with B<TEMP> taking 
+priority and B</tmp> used if neither is defined:
+
+ TMP=/tmp
+ # The above value is used if TMP isn't in the environment
+ TEMP=$ENV::TMP
+ # The above value is used if TEMP isn't in the environment
+ tmpfile=${ENV::TEMP}/tmp.filename
+
+Simple OpenSSL library configuration example to enter FIPS mode:
+
+ # Default appname: should match "appname" parameter (if any)
+ # supplied to CONF_modules_load_file et al.
+ openssl_conf = openssl_conf_section
+
+ [openssl_conf_section]
+ # Configuration module list
+ alg_section = evp_sect
+
+ [evp_sect]
+ # Set to "yes" to enter FIPS mode if supported
+ fips_mode = yes
+
+Note: in the above example you will get an error in non FIPS capable versions
+of OpenSSL.
+
+More complex OpenSSL library configuration. Add OID and don't enter FIPS mode:
+
+ # Default appname: should match "appname" parameter (if any)
+ # supplied to CONF_modules_load_file et al.
+ openssl_conf = openssl_conf_section
+
+ [openssl_conf_section]
+ # Configuration module list
+ alg_section = evp_sect
+ oid_section = new_oids
+
+ [evp_sect]
+ # This will have no effect as FIPS mode is off by default.
+ # Set to "yes" to enter FIPS mode, if supported
+ fips_mode = no
+
+ [new_oids]
+ # New OID, just short name
+ newoid1 = 1.2.3.4.1
+ # New OID shortname and long name
+ newoid2 = New OID 2 long name, 1.2.3.4.2
+
+The above examples can be used with with any application supporting library
+configuration if "openssl_conf" is modified to match the appropriate "appname".
+
+For example if the second sample file above is saved to "example.cnf" then
+the command line:
+
+ OPENSSL_CONF=example.cnf openssl asn1parse -genstr OID:1.2.3.4.1
+
+will output:
+
+    0:d=0  hl=2 l=   4 prim: OBJECT            :newoid1
+
+showing that the OID "newoid1" has been added as "1.2.3.4.1".
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Currently there is no way to include characters using the octal B<\nnn>
+form. Strings are all null terminated so nulls cannot form part of
+the value.
+
+The escaping isn't quite right: if you want to use sequences like B<\n>
+you can't use any quote escaping on the same line.
+
+Files are loaded in a single pass. This means that an variable expansion
+will only work if the variables referenced are defined earlier in the
+file.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<x509(1)|x509(1)>, L<req(1)|req(1)>, L<ca(1)|ca(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/crl.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/crl.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..044a9da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/crl.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+crl - CRL utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<crl>
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-nameopt option>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-hash>]
+[B<-issuer>]
+[B<-lastupdate>]
+[B<-nextupdate>]
+[B<-CAfile file>]
+[B<-CApath dir>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<crl> command processes CRL files in DER or PEM format.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. B<DER> format is DER encoded CRL
+structure. B<PEM> (the default) is a base64 encoded version of
+the DER form with header and footer lines.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read from or standard input if this
+option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+specifies the output filename to write to or standard output by
+default.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+print out the CRL in text form.
+
+=item B<-nameopt option>
+
+option which determines how the subject or issuer names are displayed. See
+the description of B<-nameopt> in L<x509(1)|x509(1)>.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+don't output the encoded version of the CRL.
+
+=item B<-hash>
+
+output a hash of the issuer name. This can be use to lookup CRLs in
+a directory by issuer name.
+
+=item B<-hash_old>
+
+outputs the "hash" of the CRL issuer name using the older algorithm
+as used by OpenSSL versions before 1.0.0.
+
+=item B<-issuer>
+
+output the issuer name.
+
+=item B<-lastupdate>
+
+output the lastUpdate field.
+
+=item B<-nextupdate>
+
+output the nextUpdate field.
+
+=item B<-CAfile file>
+
+verify the signature on a CRL by looking up the issuing certificate in
+B<file>
+
+=item B<-CApath dir>
+
+verify the signature on a CRL by looking up the issuing certificate in
+B<dir>. This directory must be a standard certificate directory: that
+is a hash of each subject name (using B<x509 -hash>) should be linked
+to each certificate.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The PEM CRL format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN X509 CRL-----
+ -----END X509 CRL-----
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Convert a CRL file from PEM to DER:
+
+ openssl crl -in crl.pem -outform DER -out crl.der
+
+Output the text form of a DER encoded certificate:
+
+ openssl crl -in crl.der -text -noout
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Ideally it should be possible to create a CRL using appropriate options
+and files too.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<crl2pkcs7(1)|crl2pkcs7(1)>, L<ca(1)|ca(1)>, L<x509(1)|x509(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/crl2pkcs7.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/crl2pkcs7.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3797bc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/crl2pkcs7.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+crl2pkcs7 - Create a PKCS#7 structure from a CRL and certificates.
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<crl2pkcs7>
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-certfile filename>]
+[B<-nocrl>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<crl2pkcs7> command takes an optional CRL and one or more
+certificates and converts them into a PKCS#7 degenerate "certificates
+only" structure.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the CRL input format. B<DER> format is DER encoded CRL
+structure.B<PEM> (the default) is a base64 encoded version of
+the DER form with header and footer lines.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the PKCS#7 structure output format. B<DER> format is DER
+encoded PKCS#7 structure.B<PEM> (the default) is a base64 encoded version of
+the DER form with header and footer lines.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read a CRL from or standard input if this
+option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+specifies the output filename to write the PKCS#7 structure to or standard
+output by default.
+
+=item B<-certfile filename>
+
+specifies a filename containing one or more certificates in B<PEM> format.
+All certificates in the file will be added to the PKCS#7 structure. This
+option can be used more than once to read certificates form multiple
+files.
+
+=item B<-nocrl>
+
+normally a CRL is included in the output file. With this option no CRL is
+included in the output file and a CRL is not read from the input file.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Create a PKCS#7 structure from a certificate and CRL:
+
+ openssl crl2pkcs7 -in crl.pem -certfile cert.pem -out p7.pem
+
+Creates a PKCS#7 structure in DER format with no CRL from several
+different certificates:
+
+ openssl crl2pkcs7 -nocrl -certfile newcert.pem 
+	-certfile demoCA/cacert.pem -outform DER -out p7.der
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The output file is a PKCS#7 signed data structure containing no signers and
+just certificates and an optional CRL.
+
+This utility can be used to send certificates and CAs to Netscape as part of
+the certificate enrollment process. This involves sending the DER encoded output
+as MIME type application/x-x509-user-cert.
+
+The B<PEM> encoded form with the header and footer lines removed can be used to
+install user certificates and CAs in MSIE using the Xenroll control.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<pkcs7(1)|pkcs7(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/dgst.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/dgst.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b27bb94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/dgst.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+dgst, sha, sha1, mdc2, ripemd160, sha224, sha256, sha384, sha512, md2, md4, md5, dss1 - message digests
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<dgst> 
+[B<-sha|-sha1|-mdc2|-ripemd160|-sha224|-sha256|-sha384|-sha512|-md2|-md4|-md5|-dss1>]
+[B<-c>]
+[B<-d>]
+[B<-hex>]
+[B<-binary>]
+[B<-r>]
+[B<-non-fips-allow>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-sign filename>]
+[B<-keyform arg>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-verify filename>]
+[B<-prverify filename>]
+[B<-signature filename>]
+[B<-hmac key>]
+[B<-non-fips-allow>]
+[B<-fips-fingerprint>]
+[B<file...>]
+
+B<openssl>
+[I<digest>]
+[B<...>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The digest functions output the message digest of a supplied file or files
+in hexadecimal.  The digest functions also generate and verify digital
+signatures using message digests.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-c>
+
+print out the digest in two digit groups separated by colons, only relevant if
+B<hex> format output is used.
+
+=item B<-d>
+
+print out BIO debugging information.
+
+=item B<-hex>
+
+digest is to be output as a hex dump. This is the default case for a "normal"
+digest as opposed to a digital signature.  See NOTES below for digital
+signatures using B<-hex>.
+
+=item B<-binary>
+
+output the digest or signature in binary form.
+
+=item B<-r>
+
+output the digest in the "coreutils" format used by programs like B<sha1sum>.
+
+=item B<-non-fips-allow>
+
+Allow use of non FIPS digest when in FIPS mode.  This has no effect when not in
+FIPS mode.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+filename to output to, or standard output by default.
+
+=item B<-sign filename>
+
+digitally sign the digest using the private key in "filename".
+
+=item B<-keyform arg>
+
+Specifies the key format to sign digest with. The DER, PEM, P12,
+and ENGINE formats are supported.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+Use engine B<id> for operations (including private key storage).
+This engine is not used as source for digest algorithms, unless it is
+also specified in the configuration file.
+
+=item B<-sigopt nm:v>
+
+Pass options to the signature algorithm during sign or verify operations.
+Names and values of these options are algorithm-specific.
+
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the private key password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-verify filename>
+
+verify the signature using the the public key in "filename".
+The output is either "Verification OK" or "Verification Failure".
+
+=item B<-prverify filename>
+
+verify the signature using the  the private key in "filename".
+
+=item B<-signature filename>
+
+the actual signature to verify.
+
+=item B<-hmac key>
+
+create a hashed MAC using "key".
+
+=item B<-mac alg>
+
+create MAC (keyed Message Authentication Code). The most popular MAC
+algorithm is HMAC (hash-based MAC), but there are other MAC algorithms
+which are not based on hash, for instance B<gost-mac> algorithm,
+supported by B<ccgost> engine. MAC keys and other options should be set
+via B<-macopt> parameter.
+
+=item B<-macopt nm:v>
+
+Passes options to MAC algorithm, specified by B<-mac> key.
+Following options are supported by both by B<HMAC> and B<gost-mac>:
+
+=over 8
+
+=item B<key:string>
+
+Specifies MAC key as alphnumeric string (use if key contain printable
+characters only). String length must conform to any restrictions of
+the MAC algorithm for example exactly 32 chars for gost-mac.
+
+=item B<hexkey:string>
+
+Specifies MAC key in hexadecimal form (two hex digits per byte).
+Key length must conform to any restrictions of the MAC algorithm
+for example exactly 32 chars for gost-mac.
+
+=back
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others. 
+
+=item B<-non-fips-allow>
+
+enable use of non-FIPS algorithms such as MD5 even in FIPS mode.
+
+=item B<-fips-fingerprint>
+
+compute HMAC using a specific key
+for certain OpenSSL-FIPS operations.
+
+=item B<file...>
+
+file or files to digest. If no files are specified then standard input is
+used.
+
+=back
+
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+To create a hex-encoded message digest of a file:
+ openssl dgst -md5 -hex file.txt
+
+To sign a file using SHA-256 with binary file output:
+ openssl dgst -sha256 -sign privatekey.pem -out signature.sign file.txt
+
+To verify a signature:
+ openssl dgst -sha256 -verify publickey.pem \
+ -signature signature.sign \
+ file.txt
+
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The digest of choice for all new applications is SHA1. Other digests are
+however still widely used.
+
+When signing a file, B<dgst> will automatically determine the algorithm
+(RSA, ECC, etc) to use for signing based on the private key's ASN.1 info.
+When verifying signatures, it only handles the RSA, DSA, or ECDSA signature
+itself, not the related data to identify the signer and algorithm used in
+formats such as x.509, CMS, and S/MIME.
+
+A source of random numbers is required for certain signing algorithms, in
+particular ECDSA and DSA.
+
+The signing and verify options should only be used if a single file is
+being signed or verified.
+
+Hex signatures cannot be verified using B<openssl>.  Instead, use "xxd -r"
+or similar program to transform the hex signature into a binary signature
+prior to verification.
+
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/dhparam.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/dhparam.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cd4c76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/dhparam.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+dhparam - DH parameter manipulation and generation
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl dhparam>
+[B<-inform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-outform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-in> I<filename>]
+[B<-out> I<filename>]
+[B<-dsaparam>]
+[B<-check>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-C>]
+[B<-2>]
+[B<-5>]
+[B<-rand> I<file(s)>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+[I<numbits>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+This command is used to manipulate DH parameter files.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. The B<DER> option uses an ASN1 DER encoded
+form compatible with the PKCS#3 DHparameter structure. The PEM form is the
+default format: it consists of the B<DER> format base64 encoded with
+additional header and footer lines.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in> I<filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read parameters from or standard input if
+this option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out> I<filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename parameters to. Standard output is used
+if this option is not present. The output filename should B<not> be the same
+as the input filename.
+
+=item B<-dsaparam>
+
+If this option is used, DSA rather than DH parameters are read or created;
+they are converted to DH format.  Otherwise, "strong" primes (such
+that (p-1)/2 is also prime) will be used for DH parameter generation.
+
+DH parameter generation with the B<-dsaparam> option is much faster,
+and the recommended exponent length is shorter, which makes DH key
+exchange more efficient.  Beware that with such DSA-style DH
+parameters, a fresh DH key should be created for each use to
+avoid small-subgroup attacks that may be possible otherwise.
+
+=item B<-check>
+
+check if the parameters are valid primes and generator.
+
+=item B<-2>, B<-5>
+
+The generator to use, either 2 or 5. If present then the
+input file is ignored and parameters are generated instead. If not
+present but B<numbits> is present, parameters are generated with the
+default generator 2.
+
+=item B<-rand> I<file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item I<numbits>
+
+this option specifies that a parameter set should be generated of size
+I<numbits>. It must be the last option. If this option is present then
+the input file is ignored and parameters are generated instead. If
+this option is not present but a generator (B<-2> or B<-5>) is
+present, parameters are generated with a default length of 2048 bits.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+this option inhibits the output of the encoded version of the parameters.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+this option prints out the DH parameters in human readable form.
+
+=item B<-C>
+
+this option converts the parameters into C code. The parameters can then
+be loaded by calling the B<get_dh>I<numbits>B<()> function.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<dhparam>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 WARNINGS
+
+The program B<dhparam> combines the functionality of the programs B<dh> and
+B<gendh> in previous versions of OpenSSL and SSLeay. The B<dh> and B<gendh>
+programs are retained for now but may have different purposes in future 
+versions of OpenSSL.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+PEM format DH parameters use the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN DH PARAMETERS-----
+ -----END DH PARAMETERS-----
+
+OpenSSL currently only supports the older PKCS#3 DH, not the newer X9.42
+DH.
+
+This program manipulates DH parameters not keys.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+There should be a way to generate and manipulate DH keys.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<dsaparam(1)|dsaparam(1)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The B<dhparam> command was added in OpenSSL 0.9.5.
+The B<-dsaparam> option was added in OpenSSL 0.9.6.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/dsa.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/dsa.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8bf6cc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/dsa.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+dsa - DSA key processing
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<dsa>
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-passout arg>]
+[B<-aes128>]
+[B<-aes192>]
+[B<-aes256>]
+[B<-camellia128>]
+[B<-camellia192>]
+[B<-camellia256>]
+[B<-des>]
+[B<-des3>]
+[B<-idea>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-modulus>]
+[B<-pubin>]
+[B<-pubout>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<dsa> command processes DSA keys. They can be converted between various
+forms and their components printed out. B<Note> This command uses the
+traditional SSLeay compatible format for private key encryption: newer
+applications should use the more secure PKCS#8 format using the B<pkcs8>
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. The B<DER> option with a private key uses
+an ASN1 DER encoded form of an ASN.1 SEQUENCE consisting of the values of
+version (currently zero), p, q, g, the public and private key components
+respectively as ASN.1 INTEGERs. When used with a public key it uses a
+SubjectPublicKeyInfo structure: it is an error if the key is not DSA.
+
+The B<PEM> form is the default format: it consists of the B<DER> format base64
+encoded with additional header and footer lines. In the case of a private key
+PKCS#8 format is also accepted.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read a key from or standard input if this
+option is not specified. If the key is encrypted a pass phrase will be
+prompted for.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the input file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename to write a key to or standard output by
+is not specified. If any encryption options are set then a pass phrase will be
+prompted for. The output filename should B<not> be the same as the input
+filename.
+
+=item B<-passout arg>
+
+the output file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-aes128|-aes192|-aes256|-camellia128|-camellia192|-camellia256|-des|-des3|-idea>
+
+These options encrypt the private key with the specified
+cipher before outputting it. A pass phrase is prompted for.
+If none of these options is specified the key is written in plain text. This
+means that using the B<dsa> utility to read in an encrypted key with no
+encryption option can be used to remove the pass phrase from a key, or by
+setting the encryption options it can be use to add or change the pass phrase.
+These options can only be used with PEM format output files.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+prints out the public, private key components and parameters.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+this option prevents output of the encoded version of the key.
+
+=item B<-modulus>
+
+this option prints out the value of the public key component of the key.
+
+=item B<-pubin>
+
+by default a private key is read from the input file: with this option a
+public key is read instead.
+
+=item B<-pubout>
+
+by default a private key is output. With this option a public
+key will be output instead. This option is automatically set if the input is
+a public key.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<dsa>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The PEM private key format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN DSA PRIVATE KEY-----
+ -----END DSA PRIVATE KEY-----
+
+The PEM public key format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN PUBLIC KEY-----
+ -----END PUBLIC KEY-----
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+To remove the pass phrase on a DSA private key:
+
+ openssl dsa -in key.pem -out keyout.pem
+
+To encrypt a private key using triple DES:
+
+ openssl dsa -in key.pem -des3 -out keyout.pem
+
+To convert a private key from PEM to DER format: 
+
+ openssl dsa -in key.pem -outform DER -out keyout.der
+
+To print out the components of a private key to standard output:
+
+ openssl dsa -in key.pem -text -noout
+
+To just output the public part of a private key:
+
+ openssl dsa -in key.pem -pubout -out pubkey.pem
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<dsaparam(1)|dsaparam(1)>, L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)>, L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>,
+L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/dsaparam.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/dsaparam.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba5ec4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/dsaparam.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+dsaparam - DSA parameter manipulation and generation
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl dsaparam>
+[B<-inform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-outform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-C>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<-genkey>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+[B<numbits>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+This command is used to manipulate or generate DSA parameter files.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. The B<DER> option uses an ASN1 DER encoded
+form compatible with RFC2459 (PKIX) DSS-Parms that is a SEQUENCE consisting
+of p, q and g respectively. The PEM form is the default format: it consists
+of the B<DER> format base64 encoded with additional header and footer lines.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read parameters from or standard input if
+this option is not specified. If the B<numbits> parameter is included then
+this option will be ignored.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename parameters to. Standard output is used
+if this option is not present. The output filename should B<not> be the same
+as the input filename.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+this option inhibits the output of the encoded version of the parameters.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+this option prints out the DSA parameters in human readable form.
+
+=item B<-C>
+
+this option converts the parameters into C code. The parameters can then
+be loaded by calling the B<get_dsaXXX()> function.
+
+=item B<-genkey>
+
+this option will generate a DSA either using the specified or generated
+parameters.
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<numbits>
+
+this option specifies that a parameter set should be generated of size
+B<numbits>. It must be the last option. If this option is included then
+the input file (if any) is ignored.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<dsaparam>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+PEM format DSA parameters use the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN DSA PARAMETERS-----
+ -----END DSA PARAMETERS-----
+
+DSA parameter generation is a slow process and as a result the same set of
+DSA parameters is often used to generate several distinct keys.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)>, L<dsa(1)|dsa(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>,
+L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/ec.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/ec.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c7b45d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/ec.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ec - EC key processing
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<ec>
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-passout arg>]
+[B<-des>]
+[B<-des3>]
+[B<-idea>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-param_out>]
+[B<-pubin>]
+[B<-pubout>]
+[B<-conv_form arg>]
+[B<-param_enc arg>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<ec> command processes EC keys. They can be converted between various
+forms and their components printed out. B<Note> OpenSSL uses the 
+private key format specified in 'SEC 1: Elliptic Curve Cryptography'
+(http://www.secg.org/). To convert a OpenSSL EC private key into the
+PKCS#8 private key format use the B<pkcs8> command.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. The B<DER> option with a private key uses
+an ASN.1 DER encoded SEC1 private key. When used with a public key it
+uses the SubjectPublicKeyInfo structure as specified in RFC 3280.
+The B<PEM> form is the default format: it consists of the B<DER> format base64
+encoded with additional header and footer lines. In the case of a private key
+PKCS#8 format is also accepted.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read a key from or standard input if this
+option is not specified. If the key is encrypted a pass phrase will be
+prompted for.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the input file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename to write a key to or standard output by
+is not specified. If any encryption options are set then a pass phrase will be
+prompted for. The output filename should B<not> be the same as the input
+filename.
+
+=item B<-passout arg>
+
+the output file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-des|-des3|-idea>
+
+These options encrypt the private key with the DES, triple DES, IDEA or 
+any other cipher supported by OpenSSL before outputting it. A pass phrase is
+prompted for.
+If none of these options is specified the key is written in plain text. This
+means that using the B<ec> utility to read in an encrypted key with no
+encryption option can be used to remove the pass phrase from a key, or by
+setting the encryption options it can be use to add or change the pass phrase.
+These options can only be used with PEM format output files.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+prints out the public, private key components and parameters.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+this option prevents output of the encoded version of the key.
+
+=item B<-modulus>
+
+this option prints out the value of the public key component of the key.
+
+=item B<-pubin>
+
+by default a private key is read from the input file: with this option a
+public key is read instead.
+
+=item B<-pubout>
+
+by default a private key is output. With this option a public
+key will be output instead. This option is automatically set if the input is
+a public key.
+
+=item B<-conv_form>
+
+This specifies how the points on the elliptic curve are converted
+into octet strings. Possible values are: B<compressed> (the default
+value), B<uncompressed> and B<hybrid>. For more information regarding
+the point conversion forms please read the X9.62 standard.
+B<Note> Due to patent issues the B<compressed> option is disabled
+by default for binary curves and can be enabled by defining
+the preprocessor macro B<OPENSSL_EC_BIN_PT_COMP> at compile time.
+
+=item B<-param_enc arg>
+
+This specifies how the elliptic curve parameters are encoded.
+Possible value are: B<named_curve>, i.e. the ec parameters are
+specified by a OID, or B<explicit> where the ec parameters are
+explicitly given (see RFC 3279 for the definition of the 
+EC parameters structures). The default value is B<named_curve>.
+B<Note> the B<implicitlyCA> alternative ,as specified in RFC 3279,
+is currently not implemented in OpenSSL.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<ec>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The PEM private key format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN EC PRIVATE KEY-----
+ -----END EC PRIVATE KEY-----
+
+The PEM public key format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN PUBLIC KEY-----
+ -----END PUBLIC KEY-----
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+To encrypt a private key using triple DES:
+
+ openssl ec -in key.pem -des3 -out keyout.pem
+
+To convert a private key from PEM to DER format: 
+
+ openssl ec -in key.pem -outform DER -out keyout.der
+
+To print out the components of a private key to standard output:
+
+ openssl ec -in key.pem -text -noout
+
+To just output the public part of a private key:
+
+ openssl ec -in key.pem -pubout -out pubkey.pem
+
+To change the parameters encoding to B<explicit>:
+
+ openssl ec -in key.pem -param_enc explicit -out keyout.pem
+
+To change the point conversion form to B<compressed>:
+
+ openssl ec -in key.pem -conv_form compressed -out keyout.pem
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ecparam(1)|ecparam(1)>, L<dsa(1)|dsa(1)>, L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The ec command was first introduced in OpenSSL 0.9.8.
+
+=head1 AUTHOR
+
+Nils Larsch for the OpenSSL project (http://www.openssl.org).
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/ecparam.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/ecparam.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..88e9d1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/ecparam.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ecparam - EC parameter manipulation and generation
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl ecparam>
+[B<-inform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-outform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-C>]
+[B<-check>]
+[B<-name arg>]
+[B<-list_curves>]
+[B<-conv_form arg>]
+[B<-param_enc arg>]
+[B<-no_seed>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<-genkey>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+This command is used to manipulate or generate EC parameter files.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. The B<DER> option uses an ASN.1 DER encoded
+form compatible with RFC 3279 EcpkParameters. The PEM form is the default
+format: it consists of the B<DER> format base64 encoded with additional 
+header and footer lines.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read parameters from or standard input if
+this option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename parameters to. Standard output is used
+if this option is not present. The output filename should B<not> be the same
+as the input filename.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+This option inhibits the output of the encoded version of the parameters.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+This option prints out the EC parameters in human readable form.
+
+=item B<-C>
+
+This option converts the EC parameters into C code. The parameters can then
+be loaded by calling the B<get_ec_group_XXX()> function.
+
+=item B<-check>
+
+Validate the elliptic curve parameters.
+
+=item B<-name arg>
+
+Use the EC parameters with the specified 'short' name. Use B<-list_curves>
+to get a list of all currently implemented EC parameters.
+
+=item B<-list_curves>
+
+If this options is specified B<ecparam> will print out a list of all
+currently implemented EC parameters names and exit.
+
+=item B<-conv_form>
+
+This specifies how the points on the elliptic curve are converted
+into octet strings. Possible values are: B<compressed> (the default
+value), B<uncompressed> and B<hybrid>. For more information regarding
+the point conversion forms please read the X9.62 standard.
+B<Note> Due to patent issues the B<compressed> option is disabled
+by default for binary curves and can be enabled by defining
+the preprocessor macro B<OPENSSL_EC_BIN_PT_COMP> at compile time.
+
+=item B<-param_enc arg>
+
+This specifies how the elliptic curve parameters are encoded.
+Possible value are: B<named_curve>, i.e. the ec parameters are
+specified by a OID, or B<explicit> where the ec parameters are
+explicitly given (see RFC 3279 for the definition of the 
+EC parameters structures). The default value is B<named_curve>.
+B<Note> the B<implicitlyCA> alternative ,as specified in RFC 3279,
+is currently not implemented in OpenSSL.
+
+=item B<-no_seed>
+
+This option inhibits that the 'seed' for the parameter generation
+is included in the ECParameters structure (see RFC 3279).
+
+=item B<-genkey>
+
+This option will generate a EC private key using the specified parameters.
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<ecparam>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+PEM format EC parameters use the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN EC PARAMETERS-----
+ -----END EC PARAMETERS-----
+
+OpenSSL is currently not able to generate new groups and therefore
+B<ecparam> can only create EC parameters from known (named) curves. 
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+To create EC parameters with the group 'prime192v1':
+
+  openssl ecparam -out ec_param.pem -name prime192v1
+
+To create EC parameters with explicit parameters:
+
+  openssl ecparam -out ec_param.pem -name prime192v1 -param_enc explicit
+
+To validate given EC parameters:
+
+  openssl ecparam -in ec_param.pem -check
+
+To create EC parameters and a private key:
+
+  openssl ecparam -out ec_key.pem -name prime192v1 -genkey
+
+To change the point encoding to 'compressed':
+
+  openssl ecparam -in ec_in.pem -out ec_out.pem -conv_form compressed
+
+To print out the EC parameters to standard output:
+
+  openssl ecparam -in ec_param.pem -noout -text
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ec(1)|ec(1)>, L<dsaparam(1)|dsaparam(1)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The ecparam command was first introduced in OpenSSL 0.9.8.
+
+=head1 AUTHOR
+
+Nils Larsch for the OpenSSL project (http://www.openssl.org)
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/enc.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/enc.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41791ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/enc.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,333 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+enc - symmetric cipher routines
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl enc -ciphername>
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-pass arg>]
+[B<-e>]
+[B<-d>]
+[B<-a/-base64>]
+[B<-A>]
+[B<-k password>]
+[B<-kfile filename>]
+[B<-K key>]
+[B<-iv IV>]
+[B<-S salt>]
+[B<-salt>]
+[B<-nosalt>]
+[B<-z>]
+[B<-md>]
+[B<-p>]
+[B<-P>]
+[B<-bufsize number>]
+[B<-nopad>]
+[B<-debug>]
+[B<-none>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The symmetric cipher commands allow data to be encrypted or decrypted
+using various block and stream ciphers using keys based on passwords
+or explicitly provided. Base64 encoding or decoding can also be performed
+either by itself or in addition to the encryption or decryption.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+the input filename, standard input by default.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+the output filename, standard output by default.
+
+=item B<-pass arg>
+
+the password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-salt>
+
+use a salt in the key derivation routines. This is the default.
+
+=item B<-nosalt>
+
+don't use a salt in the key derivation routines. This option B<SHOULD NOT> be
+used except for test purposes or compatibility with ancient versions of OpenSSL
+and SSLeay.
+
+=item B<-e>
+
+encrypt the input data: this is the default.
+
+=item B<-d>
+
+decrypt the input data.
+
+=item B<-a>
+
+base64 process the data. This means that if encryption is taking place
+the data is base64 encoded after encryption. If decryption is set then
+the input data is base64 decoded before being decrypted.
+
+=item B<-base64>
+
+same as B<-a>
+
+=item B<-A>
+
+if the B<-a> option is set then base64 process the data on one line.
+
+=item B<-k password>
+
+the password to derive the key from. This is for compatibility with previous
+versions of OpenSSL. Superseded by the B<-pass> argument.
+
+=item B<-kfile filename>
+
+read the password to derive the key from the first line of B<filename>.
+This is for compatibility with previous versions of OpenSSL. Superseded by
+the B<-pass> argument.
+
+=item B<-nosalt>
+
+do not use a salt 
+
+=item B<-salt>
+
+use salt (randomly generated or provide with B<-S> option) when
+encrypting (this is the default).
+
+=item B<-S salt>
+
+the actual salt to use: this must be represented as a string of hex digits.
+
+=item B<-K key>
+
+the actual key to use: this must be represented as a string comprised only
+of hex digits. If only the key is specified, the IV must additionally specified
+using the B<-iv> option. When both a key and a password are specified, the
+key given with the B<-K> option will be used and the IV generated from the
+password will be taken. It probably does not make much sense to specify
+both key and password.
+
+=item B<-iv IV>
+
+the actual IV to use: this must be represented as a string comprised only
+of hex digits. When only the key is specified using the B<-K> option, the
+IV must explicitly be defined. When a password is being specified using
+one of the other options, the IV is generated from this password.
+
+=item B<-p>
+
+print out the key and IV used.
+
+=item B<-P>
+
+print out the key and IV used then immediately exit: don't do any encryption
+or decryption.
+
+=item B<-bufsize number>
+
+set the buffer size for I/O
+
+=item B<-nopad>
+
+disable standard block padding
+
+=item B<-debug>
+
+debug the BIOs used for I/O.
+
+=item B<-z>
+
+Compress or decompress clear text using zlib before encryption or after
+decryption. This option exists only if OpenSSL with compiled with zlib
+or zlib-dynamic option.
+
+=item B<-none>
+
+Use NULL cipher (no encryption or decryption of input).
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The program can be called either as B<openssl ciphername> or
+B<openssl enc -ciphername>. But the first form doesn't work with
+engine-provided ciphers, because this form is processed before the
+configuration file is read and any ENGINEs loaded.
+
+Engines which provide entirely new encryption algorithms (such as ccgost
+engine which provides gost89 algorithm) should be configured in the
+configuration file. Engines, specified in the command line using -engine
+options can only be used for hadrware-assisted implementations of
+ciphers, which are supported by OpenSSL core or other engine, specified
+in the configuration file.
+
+When enc command lists supported ciphers, ciphers provided by engines,
+specified in the configuration files are listed too.
+
+A password will be prompted for to derive the key and IV if necessary.
+
+The B<-salt> option should B<ALWAYS> be used if the key is being derived
+from a password unless you want compatibility with previous versions of
+OpenSSL and SSLeay.
+
+Without the B<-salt> option it is possible to perform efficient dictionary
+attacks on the password and to attack stream cipher encrypted data. The reason
+for this is that without the salt the same password always generates the same
+encryption key. When the salt is being used the first eight bytes of the
+encrypted data are reserved for the salt: it is generated at random when
+encrypting a file and read from the encrypted file when it is decrypted.
+
+Some of the ciphers do not have large keys and others have security
+implications if not used correctly. A beginner is advised to just use
+a strong block cipher in CBC mode such as bf or des3.
+
+All the block ciphers normally use PKCS#5 padding also known as standard block
+padding: this allows a rudimentary integrity or password check to be
+performed. However since the chance of random data passing the test is
+better than 1 in 256 it isn't a very good test.
+
+If padding is disabled then the input data must be a multiple of the cipher
+block length.
+
+All RC2 ciphers have the same key and effective key length.
+
+Blowfish and RC5 algorithms use a 128 bit key.
+
+=head1 SUPPORTED CIPHERS
+
+Note that some of these ciphers can be disabled at compile time
+and some are available only if an appropriate engine is configured
+in the configuration file. The output of the B<enc> command run with
+unsupported options (for example B<openssl enc -help>) includes a
+list of ciphers, supported by your versesion of OpenSSL, including
+ones provided by configured engines.
+
+The B<enc> program does not support authenticated encryption modes
+like CCM and GCM. The utility does not store or retrieve the
+authentication tag.
+
+
+ base64             Base 64
+
+ bf-cbc             Blowfish in CBC mode
+ bf                 Alias for bf-cbc
+ bf-cfb             Blowfish in CFB mode
+ bf-ecb             Blowfish in ECB mode
+ bf-ofb             Blowfish in OFB mode
+
+ cast-cbc           CAST in CBC mode
+ cast               Alias for cast-cbc
+ cast5-cbc          CAST5 in CBC mode
+ cast5-cfb          CAST5 in CFB mode
+ cast5-ecb          CAST5 in ECB mode
+ cast5-ofb          CAST5 in OFB mode
+
+ des-cbc            DES in CBC mode
+ des                Alias for des-cbc
+ des-cfb            DES in CBC mode
+ des-ofb            DES in OFB mode
+ des-ecb            DES in ECB mode
+
+ des-ede-cbc        Two key triple DES EDE in CBC mode
+ des-ede            Two key triple DES EDE in ECB mode
+ des-ede-cfb        Two key triple DES EDE in CFB mode
+ des-ede-ofb        Two key triple DES EDE in OFB mode
+
+ des-ede3-cbc       Three key triple DES EDE in CBC mode
+ des-ede3           Three key triple DES EDE in ECB mode
+ des3               Alias for des-ede3-cbc
+ des-ede3-cfb       Three key triple DES EDE CFB mode
+ des-ede3-ofb       Three key triple DES EDE in OFB mode
+
+ desx               DESX algorithm.
+
+ gost89             GOST 28147-89 in CFB mode (provided by ccgost engine)
+ gost89-cnt        `GOST 28147-89 in CNT mode (provided by ccgost engine) 
+
+ idea-cbc           IDEA algorithm in CBC mode
+ idea               same as idea-cbc
+ idea-cfb           IDEA in CFB mode
+ idea-ecb           IDEA in ECB mode
+ idea-ofb           IDEA in OFB mode
+
+ rc2-cbc            128 bit RC2 in CBC mode
+ rc2                Alias for rc2-cbc
+ rc2-cfb            128 bit RC2 in CFB mode
+ rc2-ecb            128 bit RC2 in ECB mode
+ rc2-ofb            128 bit RC2 in OFB mode
+ rc2-64-cbc         64 bit RC2 in CBC mode
+ rc2-40-cbc         40 bit RC2 in CBC mode
+
+ rc4                128 bit RC4
+ rc4-64             64 bit RC4
+ rc4-40             40 bit RC4
+
+ rc5-cbc            RC5 cipher in CBC mode
+ rc5                Alias for rc5-cbc
+ rc5-cfb            RC5 cipher in CFB mode
+ rc5-ecb            RC5 cipher in ECB mode
+ rc5-ofb            RC5 cipher in OFB mode
+
+ aes-[128|192|256]-cbc	128/192/256 bit AES in CBC mode
+ aes-[128|192|256]	Alias for aes-[128|192|256]-cbc
+ aes-[128|192|256]-cfb	128/192/256 bit AES in 128 bit CFB mode
+ aes-[128|192|256]-cfb1	128/192/256 bit AES in 1 bit CFB mode
+ aes-[128|192|256]-cfb8	128/192/256 bit AES in 8 bit CFB mode
+ aes-[128|192|256]-ecb	128/192/256 bit AES in ECB mode
+ aes-[128|192|256]-ofb	128/192/256 bit AES in OFB mode
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Just base64 encode a binary file:
+
+ openssl base64 -in file.bin -out file.b64
+
+Decode the same file
+
+ openssl base64 -d -in file.b64 -out file.bin 
+
+Encrypt a file using triple DES in CBC mode using a prompted password:
+
+ openssl des3 -salt -in file.txt -out file.des3 
+
+Decrypt a file using a supplied password:
+
+ openssl des3 -d -salt -in file.des3 -out file.txt -k mypassword
+
+Encrypt a file then base64 encode it (so it can be sent via mail for example)
+using Blowfish in CBC mode:
+
+ openssl bf -a -salt -in file.txt -out file.bf
+
+Base64 decode a file then decrypt it:
+
+ openssl bf -d -salt -a -in file.bf -out file.txt
+
+Decrypt some data using a supplied 40 bit RC4 key:
+
+ openssl rc4-40 -in file.rc4 -out file.txt -K 0102030405
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The B<-A> option when used with large files doesn't work properly.
+
+There should be an option to allow an iteration count to be included.
+
+The B<enc> program only supports a fixed number of algorithms with
+certain parameters. So if, for example, you want to use RC2 with a
+76 bit key or RC4 with an 84 bit key you can't use this program.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/errstr.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/errstr.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3c6ccf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/errstr.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+errstr - lookup error codes
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl errstr error_code>
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+Sometimes an application will not load error message and only
+numerical forms will be available. The B<errstr> utility can be used to 
+display the meaning of the hex code. The hex code is the hex digits after the
+second colon.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+The error code:
+
+ 27594:error:2006D080:lib(32):func(109):reason(128):bss_file.c:107:
+
+can be displayed with:
+ 
+ openssl errstr 2006D080
+
+to produce the error message:
+
+ error:2006D080:BIO routines:BIO_new_file:no such file
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<err(3)|err(3)>,
+L<ERR_load_crypto_strings(3)|ERR_load_crypto_strings(3)>,
+L<SSL_load_error_strings(3)|SSL_load_error_strings(3)>
+
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/gendsa.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/gendsa.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d9f56be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/gendsa.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+gendsa - generate a DSA private key from a set of parameters
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<gendsa>
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-aes128>]
+[B<-aes192>]
+[B<-aes256>]
+[B<-camellia128>]
+[B<-camellia192>]
+[B<-camellia256>]
+[B<-des>]
+[B<-des3>]
+[B<-idea>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+[B<paramfile>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<gendsa> command generates a DSA private key from a DSA parameter file
+(which will be typically generated by the B<openssl dsaparam> command).
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-aes128|-aes192|-aes256|-camellia128|-camellia192|-camellia256|-des|-des3|-idea>
+
+These options encrypt the private key with specified
+cipher before outputting it. A pass phrase is prompted for.
+If none of these options is specified no encryption is used.
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<gendsa>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=item B<paramfile>
+
+This option specifies the DSA parameter file to use. The parameters in this
+file determine the size of the private key. DSA parameters can be generated
+and examined using the B<openssl dsaparam> command.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+DSA key generation is little more than random number generation so it is
+much quicker that RSA key generation for example.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<dsaparam(1)|dsaparam(1)>, L<dsa(1)|dsa(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>,
+L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/genpkey.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/genpkey.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..929edcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/genpkey.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+genpkey - generate a private key
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<genpkey>
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-pass arg>]
+[B<-cipher>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+[B<-paramfile file>]
+[B<-algorithm alg>]
+[B<-pkeyopt opt:value>]
+[B<-genparam>]
+[B<-text>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<genpkey> command generates a private key.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+the output filename. If this argument is not specified then standard output is
+used.  
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format DER or PEM.
+
+=item B<-pass arg>
+
+the output file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-cipher>
+
+This option encrypts the private key with the supplied cipher. Any algorithm
+name accepted by EVP_get_cipherbyname() is acceptable such as B<des3>.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<genpkey>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms. If used this option should precede all other
+options.
+
+=item B<-algorithm alg>
+
+public key algorithm to use such as RSA, DSA or DH. If used this option must
+precede any B<-pkeyopt> options. The options B<-paramfile> and B<-algorithm>
+are mutually exclusive.
+
+=item B<-pkeyopt opt:value>
+
+set the public key algorithm option B<opt> to B<value>. The precise set of
+options supported depends on the public key algorithm used and its
+implementation. See B<KEY GENERATION OPTIONS> below for more details.
+
+=item B<-genparam>
+
+generate a set of parameters instead of a private key. If used this option must
+precede and B<-algorithm>, B<-paramfile> or B<-pkeyopt> options.
+
+=item B<-paramfile filename>
+
+Some public key algorithms generate a private key based on a set of parameters.
+They can be supplied using this option. If this option is used the public key
+algorithm used is determined by the parameters. If used this option must
+precede and B<-pkeyopt> options. The options B<-paramfile> and B<-algorithm>
+are mutually exclusive.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+Print an (unencrypted) text representation of private and public keys and
+parameters along with the PEM or DER structure.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 KEY GENERATION OPTIONS
+
+The options supported by each algorith and indeed each implementation of an
+algorithm can vary. The options for the OpenSSL implementations are detailed
+below.
+
+=head1 RSA KEY GENERATION OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<rsa_keygen_bits:numbits>
+
+The number of bits in the generated key. If not specified 1024 is used.
+
+=item B<rsa_keygen_pubexp:value>
+
+The RSA public exponent value. This can be a large decimal or
+hexadecimal value if preceded by B<0x>. Default value is 65537.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 DSA PARAMETER GENERATION OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<dsa_paramgen_bits:numbits>
+
+The number of bits in the generated parameters. If not specified 1024 is used.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 DH PARAMETER GENERATION OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<dh_paramgen_prime_len:numbits>
+
+The number of bits in the prime parameter B<p>.
+
+=item B<dh_paramgen_generator:value>
+
+The value to use for the generator B<g>.
+
+=item B<dh_rfc5114:num>
+
+If this option is set then the appropriate RFC5114 parameters are used
+instead of generating new parameters. The value B<num> can take the
+values 1, 2 or 3 corresponding to RFC5114 DH parameters consisting of
+1024 bit group with 160 bit subgroup, 2048 bit group with 224 bit subgroup
+and 2048 bit group with 256 bit subgroup as mentioned in RFC5114 sections
+2.1, 2.2 and 2.3 respectively.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EC PARAMETER GENERATION OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<ec_paramgen_curve:curve>
+
+the EC curve to use.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 GOST2001 KEY GENERATION AND PARAMETER OPTIONS
+
+Gost 2001 support is not enabled by default. To enable this algorithm,
+one should load the ccgost engine in the OpenSSL configuration file.
+See README.gost file in the engines/ccgost directiry of the source
+distribution for more details.
+
+Use of a parameter file for the GOST R 34.10 algorithm is optional.
+Parameters can be specified during key generation directly as well as
+during generation of parameter file.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<paramset:name>
+
+Specifies GOST R 34.10-2001 parameter set according to RFC 4357.
+Parameter set can be specified using abbreviated name, object short name or
+numeric OID. Following parameter sets are supported:
+
+  paramset   OID               Usage
+  A          1.2.643.2.2.35.1  Signature
+  B          1.2.643.2.2.35.2  Signature
+  C          1.2.643.2.2.35.3  Signature
+  XA         1.2.643.2.2.36.0  Key exchange
+  XB         1.2.643.2.2.36.1  Key exchange
+  test       1.2.643.2.2.35.0  Test purposes
+
+=back
+
+
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The use of the genpkey program is encouraged over the algorithm specific
+utilities because additional algorithm options and ENGINE provided algorithms
+can be used.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Generate an RSA private key using default parameters:
+
+ openssl genpkey -algorithm RSA -out key.pem 
+
+Encrypt output private key using 128 bit AES and the passphrase "hello":
+
+ openssl genpkey -algorithm RSA -out key.pem -aes-128-cbc -pass pass:hello
+
+Generate a 2048 bit RSA key using 3 as the public exponent:
+
+ openssl genpkey -algorithm RSA -out key.pem -pkeyopt rsa_keygen_bits:2048 \
+ 						-pkeyopt rsa_keygen_pubexp:3
+
+Generate 1024 bit DSA parameters:
+
+ openssl genpkey -genparam -algorithm DSA -out dsap.pem \
+						-pkeyopt dsa_paramgen_bits:1024
+
+Generate DSA key from parameters:
+
+ openssl genpkey -paramfile dsap.pem -out dsakey.pem 
+
+Generate 1024 bit DH parameters:
+
+ openssl genpkey -genparam -algorithm DH -out dhp.pem \
+					-pkeyopt dh_paramgen_prime_len:1024
+
+Output RFC5114 2048 bit DH parameters with 224 bit subgroup:
+
+ openssl genpkey -genparam -algorithm DH -out dhp.pem -pkeyopt dh_rfc5114:2
+
+Generate DH key from parameters:
+
+ openssl genpkey -paramfile dhp.pem -out dhkey.pem 
+
+
+=cut
+
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/genrsa.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/genrsa.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3dc9870
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/genrsa.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+genrsa - generate an RSA private key
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<genrsa>
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-passout arg>]
+[B<-aes128>]
+[B<-aes192>]
+[B<-aes256>]
+[B<-camellia128>]
+[B<-camellia192>]
+[B<-camellia256>]
+[B<-des>]
+[B<-des3>]
+[B<-idea>]
+[B<-f4>]
+[B<-3>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+[B<numbits>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<genrsa> command generates an RSA private key.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+the output filename. If this argument is not specified then standard output is
+used.  
+
+=item B<-passout arg>
+
+the output file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-aes128|-aes192|-aes256|-camellia128|-camellia192|-camellia256|-des|-des3|-idea>
+
+These options encrypt the private key with specified
+cipher before outputting it. If none of these options is
+specified no encryption is used. If encryption is used a pass phrase is prompted
+for if it is not supplied via the B<-passout> argument.
+
+=item B<-F4|-3>
+
+the public exponent to use, either 65537 or 3. The default is 65537.
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<genrsa>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=item B<numbits>
+
+the size of the private key to generate in bits. This must be the last option
+specified. The default is 512.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+RSA private key generation essentially involves the generation of two prime
+numbers. When generating a private key various symbols will be output to
+indicate the progress of the generation. A B<.> represents each number which
+has passed an initial sieve test, B<+> means a number has passed a single
+round of the Miller-Rabin primality test. A newline means that the number has
+passed all the prime tests (the actual number depends on the key size).
+
+Because key generation is a random process the time taken to generate a key
+may vary somewhat.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+A quirk of the prime generation algorithm is that it cannot generate small
+primes. Therefore the number of bits should not be less that 64. For typical
+private keys this will not matter because for security reasons they will
+be much larger (typically 1024 bits).
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)>
+
+=cut
+
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/nseq.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/nseq.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..989c310
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/nseq.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+nseq - create or examine a netscape certificate sequence
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<nseq>
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-toseq>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<nseq> command takes a file containing a Netscape certificate
+sequence and prints out the certificates contained in it or takes a
+file of certificates and converts it into a Netscape certificate
+sequence.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read or standard input if this
+option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+specifies the output filename or standard output by default.
+
+=item B<-toseq>
+
+normally a Netscape certificate sequence will be input and the output
+is the certificates contained in it. With the B<-toseq> option the
+situation is reversed: a Netscape certificate sequence is created from
+a file of certificates.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Output the certificates in a Netscape certificate sequence
+
+ openssl nseq -in nseq.pem -out certs.pem
+
+Create a Netscape certificate sequence
+
+ openssl nseq -in certs.pem -toseq -out nseq.pem
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The B<PEM> encoded form uses the same headers and footers as a certificate:
+
+ -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
+ -----END CERTIFICATE-----
+
+A Netscape certificate sequence is a Netscape specific form that can be sent
+to browsers as an alternative to the standard PKCS#7 format when several
+certificates are sent to the browser: for example during certificate enrollment.
+It is used by Netscape certificate server for example.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+This program needs a few more options: like allowing DER or PEM input and
+output files and allowing multiple certificate files to be used.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/ocsp.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/ocsp.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1bb7958
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/ocsp.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,401 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ocsp - Online Certificate Status Protocol utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<ocsp>
+[B<-out file>]
+[B<-issuer file>]
+[B<-cert file>]
+[B<-serial n>]
+[B<-signer file>]
+[B<-signkey file>]
+[B<-sign_other file>]
+[B<-no_certs>]
+[B<-req_text>]
+[B<-resp_text>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-reqout file>]
+[B<-respout file>]
+[B<-reqin file>]
+[B<-respin file>]
+[B<-nonce>]
+[B<-no_nonce>]
+[B<-url URL>]
+[B<-host host:n>]
+[B<-header name value>]
+[B<-path>]
+[B<-CApath dir>]
+[B<-CAfile file>]
+[B<-no_alt_chains>]
+[B<-VAfile file>]
+[B<-validity_period n>]
+[B<-status_age n>]
+[B<-noverify>]
+[B<-verify_other file>]
+[B<-trust_other>]
+[B<-no_intern>]
+[B<-no_signature_verify>]
+[B<-no_cert_verify>]
+[B<-no_chain>]
+[B<-no_cert_checks>]
+[B<-no_explicit>]
+[B<-port num>]
+[B<-index file>]
+[B<-CA file>]
+[B<-rsigner file>]
+[B<-rkey file>]
+[B<-rother file>]
+[B<-resp_no_certs>]
+[B<-nmin n>]
+[B<-ndays n>]
+[B<-resp_key_id>]
+[B<-nrequest n>]
+[B<-md5|-sha1|...>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) enables applications to
+determine the (revocation) state of an identified certificate (RFC 2560).
+
+The B<ocsp> command performs many common OCSP tasks. It can be used
+to print out requests and responses, create requests and send queries
+to an OCSP responder and behave like a mini OCSP server itself.
+
+=head1 OCSP CLIENT OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+specify output filename, default is standard output.
+
+=item B<-issuer filename>
+
+This specifies the current issuer certificate. This option can be used
+multiple times. The certificate specified in B<filename> must be in
+PEM format. This option B<MUST> come before any B<-cert> options.
+
+=item B<-cert filename>
+
+Add the certificate B<filename> to the request. The issuer certificate
+is taken from the previous B<issuer> option, or an error occurs if no
+issuer certificate is specified.
+
+=item B<-serial num>
+
+Same as the B<cert> option except the certificate with serial number
+B<num> is added to the request. The serial number is interpreted as a
+decimal integer unless preceded by B<0x>. Negative integers can also
+be specified by preceding the value by a B<-> sign.
+
+=item B<-signer filename>, B<-signkey filename>
+
+Sign the OCSP request using the certificate specified in the B<signer>
+option and the private key specified by the B<signkey> option. If
+the B<signkey> option is not present then the private key is read
+from the same file as the certificate. If neither option is specified then
+the OCSP request is not signed.
+
+=item B<-sign_other filename>
+
+Additional certificates to include in the signed request.
+
+=item B<-nonce>, B<-no_nonce>
+
+Add an OCSP nonce extension to a request or disable OCSP nonce addition.
+Normally if an OCSP request is input using the B<respin> option no
+nonce is added: using the B<nonce> option will force addition of a nonce.
+If an OCSP request is being created (using B<cert> and B<serial> options)
+a nonce is automatically added specifying B<no_nonce> overrides this.
+
+=item B<-req_text>, B<-resp_text>, B<-text>
+
+print out the text form of the OCSP request, response or both respectively.
+
+=item B<-reqout file>, B<-respout file>
+
+write out the DER encoded certificate request or response to B<file>.
+
+=item B<-reqin file>, B<-respin file>
+
+read OCSP request or response file from B<file>. These option are ignored
+if OCSP request or response creation is implied by other options (for example
+with B<serial>, B<cert> and B<host> options).
+
+=item B<-url responder_url>
+
+specify the responder URL. Both HTTP and HTTPS (SSL/TLS) URLs can be specified.
+
+=item B<-host hostname:port>, B<-path pathname>
+
+if the B<host> option is present then the OCSP request is sent to the host
+B<hostname> on port B<port>. B<path> specifies the HTTP path name to use
+or "/" by default.
+
+=item B<-header name value>
+
+If sending a request to an OCSP server, then the specified header name and
+value are added to the HTTP request.  Note that the B<name> and B<value> must
+be specified as two separate parameters, not as a single quoted string, and
+that the header name does not have the trailing colon.
+Some OCSP responders require a Host header; use this flag to provide it.
+
+=item B<-timeout seconds>
+
+connection timeout to the OCSP responder in seconds
+
+=item B<-CAfile file>, B<-CApath pathname>
+
+file or pathname containing trusted CA certificates. These are used to verify
+the signature on the OCSP response.
+
+=item B<-no_alt_chains>
+
+See L<B<verify>|verify(1)> manual page for details.
+
+=item B<-verify_other file>
+
+file containing additional certificates to search when attempting to locate
+the OCSP response signing certificate. Some responders omit the actual signer's
+certificate from the response: this option can be used to supply the necessary
+certificate in such cases.
+
+=item B<-trust_other>
+
+the certificates specified by the B<-verify_other> option should be explicitly
+trusted and no additional checks will be performed on them. This is useful
+when the complete responder certificate chain is not available or trusting a
+root CA is not appropriate.
+
+=item B<-VAfile file>
+
+file containing explicitly trusted responder certificates. Equivalent to the
+B<-verify_other> and B<-trust_other> options.
+
+=item B<-noverify>
+
+don't attempt to verify the OCSP response signature or the nonce values. This
+option will normally only be used for debugging since it disables all verification
+of the responders certificate.
+
+=item B<-no_intern>
+
+ignore certificates contained in the OCSP response when searching for the
+signers certificate. With this option the signers certificate must be specified
+with either the B<-verify_other> or B<-VAfile> options.
+
+=item B<-no_signature_verify>
+
+don't check the signature on the OCSP response. Since this option tolerates invalid
+signatures on OCSP responses it will normally only be used for testing purposes.
+
+=item B<-no_cert_verify>
+
+don't verify the OCSP response signers certificate at all. Since this option allows
+the OCSP response to be signed by any certificate it should only be used for
+testing purposes.
+
+=item B<-no_chain>
+
+do not use certificates in the response as additional untrusted CA
+certificates.
+
+=item B<-no_explicit>
+
+do not explicitly trust the root CA if it is set to be trusted for OCSP signing.
+
+=item B<-no_cert_checks>
+
+don't perform any additional checks on the OCSP response signers certificate.
+That is do not make any checks to see if the signers certificate is authorised
+to provide the necessary status information: as a result this option should
+only be used for testing purposes.
+
+=item B<-validity_period nsec>, B<-status_age age>
+
+these options specify the range of times, in seconds, which will be tolerated
+in an OCSP response. Each certificate status response includes a B<notBefore> time and
+an optional B<notAfter> time. The current time should fall between these two values, but
+the interval between the two times may be only a few seconds. In practice the OCSP
+responder and clients clocks may not be precisely synchronised and so such a check
+may fail. To avoid this the B<-validity_period> option can be used to specify an
+acceptable error range in seconds, the default value is 5 minutes.
+
+If the B<notAfter> time is omitted from a response then this means that new status
+information is immediately available. In this case the age of the B<notBefore> field
+is checked to see it is not older than B<age> seconds old. By default this additional
+check is not performed.
+
+=item B<-md5|-sha1|-sha256|-ripemod160|...>
+
+this option sets digest algorithm to use for certificate identification
+in the OCSP request. By default SHA-1 is used. 
+
+=back
+
+=head1 OCSP SERVER OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-index indexfile>
+
+B<indexfile> is a text index file in B<ca> format containing certificate revocation
+information.
+
+If the B<index> option is specified the B<ocsp> utility is in responder mode, otherwise
+it is in client mode. The request(s) the responder processes can be either specified on
+the command line (using B<issuer> and B<serial> options), supplied in a file (using the
+B<respin> option) or via external OCSP clients (if B<port> or B<url> is specified).
+
+If the B<index> option is present then the B<CA> and B<rsigner> options must also be
+present.
+
+=item B<-CA file>
+
+CA certificate corresponding to the revocation information in B<indexfile>.
+
+=item B<-rsigner file>
+
+The certificate to sign OCSP responses with.
+
+=item B<-rother file>
+
+Additional certificates to include in the OCSP response.
+
+=item B<-resp_no_certs>
+
+Don't include any certificates in the OCSP response.
+
+=item B<-resp_key_id>
+
+Identify the signer certificate using the key ID, default is to use the subject name.
+
+=item B<-rkey file>
+
+The private key to sign OCSP responses with: if not present the file specified in the
+B<rsigner> option is used.
+
+=item B<-port portnum>
+
+Port to listen for OCSP requests on. The port may also be specified using the B<url>
+option.
+
+=item B<-nrequest number>
+
+The OCSP server will exit after receiving B<number> requests, default unlimited. 
+
+=item B<-nmin minutes>, B<-ndays days>
+
+Number of minutes or days when fresh revocation information is available: used in the
+B<nextUpdate> field. If neither option is present then the B<nextUpdate> field is 
+omitted meaning fresh revocation information is immediately available.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 OCSP Response verification.
+
+OCSP Response follows the rules specified in RFC2560.
+
+Initially the OCSP responder certificate is located and the signature on
+the OCSP request checked using the responder certificate's public key.
+
+Then a normal certificate verify is performed on the OCSP responder certificate
+building up a certificate chain in the process. The locations of the trusted
+certificates used to build the chain can be specified by the B<CAfile>
+and B<CApath> options or they will be looked for in the standard OpenSSL
+certificates directory.
+
+If the initial verify fails then the OCSP verify process halts with an
+error.
+
+Otherwise the issuing CA certificate in the request is compared to the OCSP
+responder certificate: if there is a match then the OCSP verify succeeds.
+
+Otherwise the OCSP responder certificate's CA is checked against the issuing
+CA certificate in the request. If there is a match and the OCSPSigning
+extended key usage is present in the OCSP responder certificate then the
+OCSP verify succeeds.
+
+Otherwise, if B<-no_explicit> is B<not> set the root CA of the OCSP responders
+CA is checked to see if it is trusted for OCSP signing. If it is the OCSP
+verify succeeds.
+
+If none of these checks is successful then the OCSP verify fails.
+
+What this effectively means if that if the OCSP responder certificate is
+authorised directly by the CA it is issuing revocation information about
+(and it is correctly configured) then verification will succeed.
+
+If the OCSP responder is a "global responder" which can give details about
+multiple CAs and has its own separate certificate chain then its root
+CA can be trusted for OCSP signing. For example:
+
+ openssl x509 -in ocspCA.pem -addtrust OCSPSigning -out trustedCA.pem
+
+Alternatively the responder certificate itself can be explicitly trusted
+with the B<-VAfile> option.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+As noted, most of the verify options are for testing or debugging purposes.
+Normally only the B<-CApath>, B<-CAfile> and (if the responder is a 'global
+VA') B<-VAfile> options need to be used.
+
+The OCSP server is only useful for test and demonstration purposes: it is
+not really usable as a full OCSP responder. It contains only a very
+simple HTTP request handling and can only handle the POST form of OCSP
+queries. It also handles requests serially meaning it cannot respond to
+new requests until it has processed the current one. The text index file
+format of revocation is also inefficient for large quantities of revocation
+data.
+
+It is possible to run the B<ocsp> application in responder mode via a CGI
+script using the B<respin> and B<respout> options.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Create an OCSP request and write it to a file:
+
+ openssl ocsp -issuer issuer.pem -cert c1.pem -cert c2.pem -reqout req.der
+
+Send a query to an OCSP responder with URL http://ocsp.myhost.com/ save the 
+response to a file and print it out in text form
+
+ openssl ocsp -issuer issuer.pem -cert c1.pem -cert c2.pem \
+     -url http://ocsp.myhost.com/ -resp_text -respout resp.der
+
+Read in an OCSP response and print out text form:
+
+ openssl ocsp -respin resp.der -text
+
+OCSP server on port 8888 using a standard B<ca> configuration, and a separate
+responder certificate. All requests and responses are printed to a file.
+
+ openssl ocsp -index demoCA/index.txt -port 8888 -rsigner rcert.pem -CA demoCA/cacert.pem
+	-text -out log.txt
+
+As above but exit after processing one request:
+
+ openssl ocsp -index demoCA/index.txt -port 8888 -rsigner rcert.pem -CA demoCA/cacert.pem
+     -nrequest 1
+
+Query status information using internally generated request:
+
+ openssl ocsp -index demoCA/index.txt -rsigner rcert.pem -CA demoCA/cacert.pem
+     -issuer demoCA/cacert.pem -serial 1
+
+Query status information using request read from a file, write response to a
+second file.
+
+ openssl ocsp -index demoCA/index.txt -rsigner rcert.pem -CA demoCA/cacert.pem
+     -reqin req.der -respout resp.der
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The -no_alt_chains options was first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2b.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/openssl.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/openssl.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64a160c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/openssl.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,422 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+openssl - OpenSSL command line tool
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl>
+I<command>
+[ I<command_opts> ]
+[ I<command_args> ]
+
+B<openssl> [ B<list-standard-commands> | B<list-message-digest-commands> | B<list-cipher-commands> | B<list-cipher-algorithms> | B<list-message-digest-algorithms> | B<list-public-key-algorithms>]
+
+B<openssl> B<no->I<XXX> [ I<arbitrary options> ]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+OpenSSL is a cryptography toolkit implementing the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL
+v2/v3) and Transport Layer Security (TLS v1) network protocols and related
+cryptography standards required by them.
+
+The B<openssl> program is a command line tool for using the various
+cryptography functions of OpenSSL's B<crypto> library from the shell. 
+It can be used for 
+
+ o  Creation and management of private keys, public keys and parameters
+ o  Public key cryptographic operations
+ o  Creation of X.509 certificates, CSRs and CRLs 
+ o  Calculation of Message Digests
+ o  Encryption and Decryption with Ciphers
+ o  SSL/TLS Client and Server Tests
+ o  Handling of S/MIME signed or encrypted mail
+ o  Time Stamp requests, generation and verification
+
+=head1 COMMAND SUMMARY
+
+The B<openssl> program provides a rich variety of commands (I<command> in the
+SYNOPSIS above), each of which often has a wealth of options and arguments
+(I<command_opts> and I<command_args> in the SYNOPSIS).
+
+The pseudo-commands B<list-standard-commands>, B<list-message-digest-commands>,
+and B<list-cipher-commands> output a list (one entry per line) of the names
+of all standard commands, message digest commands, or cipher commands,
+respectively, that are available in the present B<openssl> utility.
+
+The pseudo-commands B<list-cipher-algorithms> and
+B<list-message-digest-algorithms> list all cipher and message digest names, one entry per line. Aliases are listed as:
+
+ from => to
+
+The pseudo-command B<list-public-key-algorithms> lists all supported public
+key algorithms.
+
+The pseudo-command B<no->I<XXX> tests whether a command of the
+specified name is available.  If no command named I<XXX> exists, it
+returns 0 (success) and prints B<no->I<XXX>; otherwise it returns 1
+and prints I<XXX>.  In both cases, the output goes to B<stdout> and
+nothing is printed to B<stderr>.  Additional command line arguments
+are always ignored.  Since for each cipher there is a command of the
+same name, this provides an easy way for shell scripts to test for the
+availability of ciphers in the B<openssl> program.  (B<no->I<XXX> is
+not able to detect pseudo-commands such as B<quit>,
+B<list->I<...>B<-commands>, or B<no->I<XXX> itself.)
+
+=head2 STANDARD COMMANDS
+
+=over 10
+
+=item L<B<asn1parse>|asn1parse(1)>
+
+Parse an ASN.1 sequence.
+
+=item L<B<ca>|ca(1)>
+
+Certificate Authority (CA) Management.  
+
+=item L<B<ciphers>|ciphers(1)>
+
+Cipher Suite Description Determination.
+
+=item L<B<cms>|cms(1)>
+
+CMS (Cryptographic Message Syntax) utility
+
+=item L<B<crl>|crl(1)>
+
+Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Management.
+
+=item L<B<crl2pkcs7>|crl2pkcs7(1)>
+
+CRL to PKCS#7 Conversion.
+
+=item L<B<dgst>|dgst(1)>
+
+Message Digest Calculation.
+
+=item B<dh>
+
+Diffie-Hellman Parameter Management.
+Obsoleted by L<B<dhparam>|dhparam(1)>.
+
+=item L<B<dhparam>|dhparam(1)>
+
+Generation and Management of Diffie-Hellman Parameters. Superseded by 
+L<B<genpkey>|genpkey(1)> and L<B<pkeyparam>|pkeyparam(1)>
+
+
+=item L<B<dsa>|dsa(1)>
+
+DSA Data Management.
+
+=item L<B<dsaparam>|dsaparam(1)>
+
+DSA Parameter Generation and Management. Superseded by 
+L<B<genpkey>|genpkey(1)> and L<B<pkeyparam>|pkeyparam(1)>
+
+=item L<B<ec>|ec(1)>
+
+EC (Elliptic curve) key processing
+
+=item L<B<ecparam>|ecparam(1)>
+
+EC parameter manipulation and generation
+
+=item L<B<enc>|enc(1)>
+
+Encoding with Ciphers.
+
+=item L<B<engine>|engine(1)>
+
+Engine (loadble module) information and manipulation.
+
+=item L<B<errstr>|errstr(1)>
+
+Error Number to Error String Conversion.
+
+=item B<gendh>
+
+Generation of Diffie-Hellman Parameters.
+Obsoleted by L<B<dhparam>|dhparam(1)>.
+
+=item L<B<gendsa>|gendsa(1)>
+
+Generation of DSA Private Key from Parameters. Superseded by 
+L<B<genpkey>|genpkey(1)> and L<B<pkey>|pkey(1)>
+
+=item L<B<genpkey>|genpkey(1)>
+
+Generation of Private Key or Parameters.
+
+=item L<B<genrsa>|genrsa(1)>
+
+Generation of RSA Private Key. Superceded by L<B<genpkey>|genpkey(1)>.
+
+=item L<B<nseq>|nseq(1)>
+
+Create or examine a netscape certificate sequence
+
+=item L<B<ocsp>|ocsp(1)>
+
+Online Certificate Status Protocol utility.
+
+=item L<B<passwd>|passwd(1)>
+
+Generation of hashed passwords.
+
+=item L<B<pkcs12>|pkcs12(1)>
+
+PKCS#12 Data Management.
+
+=item L<B<pkcs7>|pkcs7(1)>
+
+PKCS#7 Data Management.
+
+=item L<B<pkey>|pkey(1)>
+
+Public and private key management.
+
+=item L<B<pkeyparam>|pkeyparam(1)>
+
+Public key algorithm parameter management.
+
+=item L<B<pkeyutl>|pkeyutl(1)>
+
+Public key algorithm cryptographic operation utility.
+
+=item L<B<rand>|rand(1)>
+
+Generate pseudo-random bytes.
+
+=item L<B<req>|req(1)>
+
+PKCS#10 X.509 Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Management.
+
+=item L<B<rsa>|rsa(1)>
+
+RSA key management.
+
+
+=item L<B<rsautl>|rsautl(1)>
+
+RSA utility for signing, verification, encryption, and decryption. Superseded
+by  L<B<pkeyutl>|pkeyutl(1)>
+
+=item L<B<s_client>|s_client(1)>
+
+This implements a generic SSL/TLS client which can establish a transparent
+connection to a remote server speaking SSL/TLS. It's intended for testing
+purposes only and provides only rudimentary interface functionality but
+internally uses mostly all functionality of the OpenSSL B<ssl> library.
+
+=item L<B<s_server>|s_server(1)>
+
+This implements a generic SSL/TLS server which accepts connections from remote
+clients speaking SSL/TLS. It's intended for testing purposes only and provides
+only rudimentary interface functionality but internally uses mostly all
+functionality of the OpenSSL B<ssl> library.  It provides both an own command
+line oriented protocol for testing SSL functions and a simple HTTP response
+facility to emulate an SSL/TLS-aware webserver.
+
+=item L<B<s_time>|s_time(1)>
+
+SSL Connection Timer.
+
+=item L<B<sess_id>|sess_id(1)>
+
+SSL Session Data Management.
+
+=item L<B<smime>|smime(1)>
+
+S/MIME mail processing.
+
+=item L<B<speed>|speed(1)>
+
+Algorithm Speed Measurement.
+
+=item L<B<spkac>|spkac(1)>
+
+SPKAC printing and generating utility
+
+=item L<B<ts>|ts(1)>
+
+Time Stamping Authority tool (client/server)
+
+=item L<B<verify>|verify(1)>
+
+X.509 Certificate Verification.
+
+=item L<B<version>|version(1)>
+
+OpenSSL Version Information.
+
+=item L<B<x509>|x509(1)>
+
+X.509 Certificate Data Management.
+
+=back
+
+=head2 MESSAGE DIGEST COMMANDS
+
+=over 10
+
+=item B<md2>
+
+MD2 Digest
+
+=item B<md5>
+
+MD5 Digest
+
+=item B<mdc2>
+
+MDC2 Digest
+
+=item B<rmd160>
+
+RMD-160 Digest
+
+=item B<sha>            
+
+SHA Digest
+
+=item B<sha1>           
+
+SHA-1 Digest
+
+=item B<sha224>
+
+SHA-224 Digest
+
+=item B<sha256>
+
+SHA-256 Digest
+
+=item B<sha384>
+
+SHA-384 Digest
+
+=item B<sha512>
+
+SHA-512 Digest
+
+=back
+
+=head2 ENCODING AND CIPHER COMMANDS
+
+=over 10
+
+=item B<base64>
+
+Base64 Encoding
+
+=item B<bf bf-cbc bf-cfb bf-ecb bf-ofb>
+
+Blowfish Cipher
+
+=item B<cast cast-cbc>
+
+CAST Cipher
+
+=item B<cast5-cbc cast5-cfb cast5-ecb cast5-ofb>
+
+CAST5 Cipher
+
+=item B<des des-cbc des-cfb des-ecb des-ede des-ede-cbc des-ede-cfb des-ede-ofb des-ofb>
+
+DES Cipher
+
+=item B<des3 desx des-ede3 des-ede3-cbc des-ede3-cfb des-ede3-ofb>
+
+Triple-DES Cipher
+
+=item B<idea idea-cbc idea-cfb idea-ecb idea-ofb>
+
+IDEA Cipher
+
+=item B<rc2 rc2-cbc rc2-cfb rc2-ecb rc2-ofb>
+
+RC2 Cipher
+
+=item B<rc4>
+
+RC4 Cipher
+
+=item B<rc5 rc5-cbc rc5-cfb rc5-ecb rc5-ofb>
+
+RC5 Cipher
+
+=back
+
+=head1 PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS
+
+Several commands accept password arguments, typically using B<-passin>
+and B<-passout> for input and output passwords respectively. These allow
+the password to be obtained from a variety of sources. Both of these
+options take a single argument whose format is described below. If no
+password argument is given and a password is required then the user is
+prompted to enter one: this will typically be read from the current
+terminal with echoing turned off.
+
+=over 10
+
+=item B<pass:password>
+
+the actual password is B<password>. Since the password is visible
+to utilities (like 'ps' under Unix) this form should only be used
+where security is not important.
+
+=item B<env:var>
+
+obtain the password from the environment variable B<var>. Since
+the environment of other processes is visible on certain platforms
+(e.g. ps under certain Unix OSes) this option should be used with caution.
+
+=item B<file:pathname>
+
+the first line of B<pathname> is the password. If the same B<pathname>
+argument is supplied to B<-passin> and B<-passout> arguments then the first
+line will be used for the input password and the next line for the output
+password. B<pathname> need not refer to a regular file: it could for example
+refer to a device or named pipe.
+
+=item B<fd:number>
+
+read the password from the file descriptor B<number>. This can be used to
+send the data via a pipe for example.
+
+=item B<stdin>
+
+read the password from standard input.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<asn1parse(1)|asn1parse(1)>, L<ca(1)|ca(1)>, L<config(5)|config(5)>,
+L<crl(1)|crl(1)>, L<crl2pkcs7(1)|crl2pkcs7(1)>, L<dgst(1)|dgst(1)>,
+L<dhparam(1)|dhparam(1)>, L<dsa(1)|dsa(1)>, L<dsaparam(1)|dsaparam(1)>,
+L<enc(1)|enc(1)>, L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)>, L<genpkey(1)|genpkey(1)>,
+L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>, L<nseq(1)|nseq(1)>, L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>,
+L<passwd(1)|passwd(1)>,
+L<pkcs12(1)|pkcs12(1)>, L<pkcs7(1)|pkcs7(1)>, L<pkcs8(1)|pkcs8(1)>,
+L<rand(1)|rand(1)>, L<req(1)|req(1)>, L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>,
+L<rsautl(1)|rsautl(1)>, L<s_client(1)|s_client(1)>,
+L<s_server(1)|s_server(1)>, L<s_time(1)|s_time(1)>,
+L<smime(1)|smime(1)>, L<spkac(1)|spkac(1)>,
+L<verify(1)|verify(1)>, L<version(1)|version(1)>, L<x509(1)|x509(1)>,
+L<crypto(3)|crypto(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<x509v3_config(5)|x509v3_config(5)> 
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The openssl(1) document appeared in OpenSSL 0.9.2.
+The B<list->I<XXX>B<-commands> pseudo-commands were added in OpenSSL 0.9.3;
+The B<list->I<XXX>B<-algorithms> pseudo-commands were added in OpenSSL 1.0.0;
+the B<no->I<XXX> pseudo-commands were added in OpenSSL 0.9.5a.
+For notes on the availability of other commands, see their individual
+manual pages.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/passwd.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/passwd.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f449825
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/passwd.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+passwd - compute password hashes
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl passwd>
+[B<-crypt>]
+[B<-1>]
+[B<-apr1>]
+[B<-salt> I<string>]
+[B<-in> I<file>]
+[B<-stdin>]
+[B<-noverify>]
+[B<-quiet>]
+[B<-table>]
+{I<password>}
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<passwd> command computes the hash of a password typed at
+run-time or the hash of each password in a list.  The password list is
+taken from the named file for option B<-in file>, from stdin for
+option B<-stdin>, or from the command line, or from the terminal otherwise.
+The Unix standard algorithm B<crypt> and the MD5-based BSD password
+algorithm B<1> and its Apache variant B<apr1> are available.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-crypt>
+
+Use the B<crypt> algorithm (default).
+
+=item B<-1>
+
+Use the MD5 based BSD password algorithm B<1>.
+
+=item B<-apr1>
+
+Use the B<apr1> algorithm (Apache variant of the BSD algorithm).
+
+=item B<-salt> I<string>
+
+Use the specified salt.
+When reading a password from the terminal, this implies B<-noverify>.
+
+=item B<-in> I<file>
+
+Read passwords from I<file>.
+
+=item B<-stdin>
+
+Read passwords from B<stdin>.
+
+=item B<-noverify>
+
+Don't verify when reading a password from the terminal.
+
+=item B<-quiet>
+
+Don't output warnings when passwords given at the command line are truncated.
+
+=item B<-table>
+
+In the output list, prepend the cleartext password and a TAB character
+to each password hash.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+B<openssl passwd -crypt -salt xx password> prints B<xxj31ZMTZzkVA>.
+
+B<openssl passwd -1 -salt xxxxxxxx password> prints B<$1$xxxxxxxx$UYCIxa628.9qXjpQCjM4a.>.
+
+B<openssl passwd -apr1 -salt xxxxxxxx password> prints B<$apr1$xxxxxxxx$dxHfLAsjHkDRmG83UXe8K0>.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/pkcs12.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/pkcs12.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7449848
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/pkcs12.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,368 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+pkcs12 - PKCS#12 file utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<pkcs12>
+[B<-export>]
+[B<-chain>]
+[B<-inkey filename>]
+[B<-certfile filename>]
+[B<-name name>]
+[B<-caname name>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-nomacver>]
+[B<-nocerts>]
+[B<-clcerts>]
+[B<-cacerts>]
+[B<-nokeys>]
+[B<-info>]
+[B<-des | -des3 | -idea | -aes128 | -aes192 | -aes256 | -camellia128 | -camellia192 | -camellia256 | -nodes>]
+[B<-noiter>]
+[B<-maciter | -nomaciter | -nomac>]
+[B<-twopass>]
+[B<-descert>]
+[B<-certpbe cipher>]
+[B<-keypbe cipher>]
+[B<-macalg digest>]
+[B<-keyex>]
+[B<-keysig>]
+[B<-password arg>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-passout arg>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<-CAfile file>]
+[B<-CApath dir>]
+[B<-CSP name>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<pkcs12> command allows PKCS#12 files (sometimes referred to as
+PFX files) to be created and parsed. PKCS#12 files are used by several
+programs including Netscape, MSIE and MS Outlook.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+There are a lot of options the meaning of some depends of whether a PKCS#12 file
+is being created or parsed. By default a PKCS#12 file is parsed. A PKCS#12
+file can be created by using the B<-export> option (see below).
+
+=head1 PARSING OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies filename of the PKCS#12 file to be parsed. Standard input is used
+by default.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+The filename to write certificates and private keys to, standard output by
+default.  They are all written in PEM format.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the PKCS#12 file (i.e. input file) password source. For more information about
+the format of B<arg> see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in
+L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-passout arg>
+
+pass phrase source to encrypt any outputted private keys with. For more
+information about the format of B<arg> see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section
+in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-password arg>
+
+With -export, -password is equivalent to -passout.
+Otherwise, -password is equivalent to -passin.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+this option inhibits output of the keys and certificates to the output file
+version of the PKCS#12 file.
+
+=item B<-clcerts>
+
+only output client certificates (not CA certificates).
+
+=item B<-cacerts>
+
+only output CA certificates (not client certificates).
+
+=item B<-nocerts>
+
+no certificates at all will be output.
+
+=item B<-nokeys>
+
+no private keys will be output.
+
+=item B<-info>
+
+output additional information about the PKCS#12 file structure, algorithms used and
+iteration counts.
+
+=item B<-des>
+
+use DES to encrypt private keys before outputting.
+
+=item B<-des3>
+
+use triple DES to encrypt private keys before outputting, this is the default.
+
+=item B<-idea>
+
+use IDEA to encrypt private keys before outputting.
+
+=item B<-aes128>, B<-aes192>, B<-aes256>
+
+use AES to encrypt private keys before outputting.
+
+=item B<-camellia128>, B<-camellia192>, B<-camellia256>
+
+use Camellia to encrypt private keys before outputting.
+
+=item B<-nodes>
+
+don't encrypt the private keys at all.
+
+=item B<-nomacver>
+
+don't attempt to verify the integrity MAC before reading the file.
+
+=item B<-twopass>
+
+prompt for separate integrity and encryption passwords: most software
+always assumes these are the same so this option will render such
+PKCS#12 files unreadable.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 FILE CREATION OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-export>
+
+This option specifies that a PKCS#12 file will be created rather than
+parsed.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies filename to write the PKCS#12 file to. Standard output is used
+by default.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+The filename to read certificates and private keys from, standard input by
+default.  They must all be in PEM format. The order doesn't matter but one
+private key and its corresponding certificate should be present. If additional
+certificates are present they will also be included in the PKCS#12 file.
+
+=item B<-inkey filename>
+
+file to read private key from. If not present then a private key must be present
+in the input file.
+
+=item B<-name friendlyname>
+
+This specifies the "friendly name" for the certificate and private key. This
+name is typically displayed in list boxes by software importing the file.
+
+=item B<-certfile filename>
+
+A filename to read additional certificates from.
+
+=item B<-caname friendlyname>
+
+This specifies the "friendly name" for other certificates. This option may be
+used multiple times to specify names for all certificates in the order they
+appear. Netscape ignores friendly names on other certificates whereas MSIE
+displays them.
+
+=item B<-pass arg>, B<-passout arg>
+
+the PKCS#12 file (i.e. output file) password source. For more information about
+the format of B<arg> see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in
+L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-passin password>
+
+pass phrase source to decrypt any input private keys with. For more information
+about the format of B<arg> see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in
+L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-chain>
+
+if this option is present then an attempt is made to include the entire
+certificate chain of the user certificate. The standard CA store is used
+for this search. If the search fails it is considered a fatal error.
+
+=item B<-descert>
+
+encrypt the certificate using triple DES, this may render the PKCS#12
+file unreadable by some "export grade" software. By default the private
+key is encrypted using triple DES and the certificate using 40 bit RC2.
+
+=item B<-keypbe alg>, B<-certpbe alg>
+
+these options allow the algorithm used to encrypt the private key and
+certificates to be selected. Any PKCS#5 v1.5 or PKCS#12 PBE algorithm name
+can be used (see B<NOTES> section for more information). If a cipher name
+(as output by the B<list-cipher-algorithms> command is specified then it
+is used with PKCS#5 v2.0. For interoperability reasons it is advisable to only
+use PKCS#12 algorithms.
+
+=item B<-keyex|-keysig>
+
+specifies that the private key is to be used for key exchange or just signing.
+This option is only interpreted by MSIE and similar MS software. Normally
+"export grade" software will only allow 512 bit RSA keys to be used for
+encryption purposes but arbitrary length keys for signing. The B<-keysig>
+option marks the key for signing only. Signing only keys can be used for
+S/MIME signing, authenticode (ActiveX control signing)  and SSL client
+authentication, however due to a bug only MSIE 5.0 and later support
+the use of signing only keys for SSL client authentication.
+
+=item B<-macalg digest>
+
+specify the MAC digest algorithm. If not included them SHA1 will be used.
+
+=item B<-nomaciter>, B<-noiter>
+
+these options affect the iteration counts on the MAC and key algorithms.
+Unless you wish to produce files compatible with MSIE 4.0 you should leave
+these options alone.
+
+To discourage attacks by using large dictionaries of common passwords the
+algorithm that derives keys from passwords can have an iteration count applied
+to it: this causes a certain part of the algorithm to be repeated and slows it
+down. The MAC is used to check the file integrity but since it will normally
+have the same password as the keys and certificates it could also be attacked.
+By default both MAC and encryption iteration counts are set to 2048, using
+these options the MAC and encryption iteration counts can be set to 1, since
+this reduces the file security you should not use these options unless you
+really have to. Most software supports both MAC and key iteration counts.
+MSIE 4.0 doesn't support MAC iteration counts so it needs the B<-nomaciter>
+option.
+
+=item B<-maciter>
+
+This option is included for compatibility with previous versions, it used
+to be needed to use MAC iterations counts but they are now used by default.
+
+=item B<-nomac>
+
+don't attempt to provide the MAC integrity.
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<-CAfile file>
+
+CA storage as a file.
+
+=item B<-CApath dir>
+
+CA storage as a directory. This directory must be a standard certificate
+directory: that is a hash of each subject name (using B<x509 -hash>) should be
+linked to each certificate.
+
+=item B<-CSP name>
+
+write B<name> as a Microsoft CSP name.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+Although there are a large number of options most of them are very rarely
+used. For PKCS#12 file parsing only B<-in> and B<-out> need to be used
+for PKCS#12 file creation B<-export> and B<-name> are also used.
+
+If none of the B<-clcerts>, B<-cacerts> or B<-nocerts> options are present
+then all certificates will be output in the order they appear in the input
+PKCS#12 files. There is no guarantee that the first certificate present is
+the one corresponding to the private key. Certain software which requires
+a private key and certificate and assumes the first certificate in the
+file is the one corresponding to the private key: this may not always
+be the case. Using the B<-clcerts> option will solve this problem by only
+outputting the certificate corresponding to the private key. If the CA
+certificates are required then they can be output to a separate file using
+the B<-nokeys -cacerts> options to just output CA certificates.
+
+The B<-keypbe> and B<-certpbe> algorithms allow the precise encryption
+algorithms for private keys and certificates to be specified. Normally
+the defaults are fine but occasionally software can't handle triple DES
+encrypted private keys, then the option B<-keypbe PBE-SHA1-RC2-40> can
+be used to reduce the private key encryption to 40 bit RC2. A complete
+description of all algorithms is contained in the B<pkcs8> manual page.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Parse a PKCS#12 file and output it to a file:
+
+ openssl pkcs12 -in file.p12 -out file.pem
+
+Output only client certificates to a file:
+
+ openssl pkcs12 -in file.p12 -clcerts -out file.pem
+
+Don't encrypt the private key:
+ 
+ openssl pkcs12 -in file.p12 -out file.pem -nodes
+
+Print some info about a PKCS#12 file:
+
+ openssl pkcs12 -in file.p12 -info -noout
+
+Create a PKCS#12 file:
+
+ openssl pkcs12 -export -in file.pem -out file.p12 -name "My Certificate"
+
+Include some extra certificates:
+
+ openssl pkcs12 -export -in file.pem -out file.p12 -name "My Certificate" \
+  -certfile othercerts.pem
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Some would argue that the PKCS#12 standard is one big bug :-)
+
+Versions of OpenSSL before 0.9.6a had a bug in the PKCS#12 key generation
+routines. Under rare circumstances this could produce a PKCS#12 file encrypted
+with an invalid key. As a result some PKCS#12 files which triggered this bug
+from other implementations (MSIE or Netscape) could not be decrypted
+by OpenSSL and similarly OpenSSL could produce PKCS#12 files which could
+not be decrypted by other implementations. The chances of producing such
+a file are relatively small: less than 1 in 256.
+
+A side effect of fixing this bug is that any old invalidly encrypted PKCS#12
+files cannot no longer be parsed by the fixed version. Under such circumstances
+the B<pkcs12> utility will report that the MAC is OK but fail with a decryption
+error when extracting private keys.
+
+This problem can be resolved by extracting the private keys and certificates
+from the PKCS#12 file using an older version of OpenSSL and recreating the PKCS#12
+file from the keys and certificates using a newer version of OpenSSL. For example:
+
+ old-openssl -in bad.p12 -out keycerts.pem
+ openssl -in keycerts.pem -export -name "My PKCS#12 file" -out fixed.p12
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<pkcs8(1)|pkcs8(1)>
+
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/pkcs7.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/pkcs7.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..acfb810
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/pkcs7.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+pkcs7 - PKCS#7 utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<pkcs7>
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-print_certs>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<pkcs7> command processes PKCS#7 files in DER or PEM format.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. B<DER> format is DER encoded PKCS#7
+v1.5 structure.B<PEM> (the default) is a base64 encoded version of
+the DER form with header and footer lines.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read from or standard input if this
+option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+specifies the output filename to write to or standard output by
+default.
+
+=item B<-print_certs>
+
+prints out any certificates or CRLs contained in the file. They are
+preceded by their subject and issuer names in one line format.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+prints out certificates details in full rather than just subject and
+issuer names.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+don't output the encoded version of the PKCS#7 structure (or certificates
+is B<-print_certs> is set).
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<pkcs7>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Convert a PKCS#7 file from PEM to DER:
+
+ openssl pkcs7 -in file.pem -outform DER -out file.der
+
+Output all certificates in a file:
+
+ openssl pkcs7 -in file.pem -print_certs -out certs.pem
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The PEM PKCS#7 format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN PKCS7-----
+ -----END PKCS7-----
+
+For compatibility with some CAs it will also accept:
+
+ -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
+ -----END CERTIFICATE-----
+
+=head1 RESTRICTIONS
+
+There is no option to print out all the fields of a PKCS#7 file.
+
+This PKCS#7 routines only understand PKCS#7 v 1.5 as specified in RFC2315 they 
+cannot currently parse, for example, the new CMS as described in RFC2630.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<crl2pkcs7(1)|crl2pkcs7(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/pkcs8.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/pkcs8.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6901f1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/pkcs8.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+pkcs8 - PKCS#8 format private key conversion tool
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<pkcs8>
+[B<-topk8>]
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-passout arg>]
+[B<-noiter>]
+[B<-nocrypt>]
+[B<-nooct>]
+[B<-embed>]
+[B<-nsdb>]
+[B<-v2 alg>]
+[B<-v2prf alg>]
+[B<-v1 alg>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<pkcs8> command processes private keys in PKCS#8 format. It can handle
+both unencrypted PKCS#8 PrivateKeyInfo format and EncryptedPrivateKeyInfo
+format with a variety of PKCS#5 (v1.5 and v2.0) and PKCS#12 algorithms.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-topk8>
+
+Normally a PKCS#8 private key is expected on input and a traditional format
+private key will be written. With the B<-topk8> option the situation is
+reversed: it reads a traditional format private key and writes a PKCS#8
+format key.
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. If a PKCS#8 format key is expected on input
+then either a B<DER> or B<PEM> encoded version of a PKCS#8 key will be
+expected. Otherwise the B<DER> or B<PEM> format of the traditional format
+private key is used.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read a key from or standard input if this
+option is not specified. If the key is encrypted a pass phrase will be
+prompted for.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the input file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename to write a key to or standard output by
+default. If any encryption options are set then a pass phrase will be
+prompted for. The output filename should B<not> be the same as the input
+filename.
+
+=item B<-passout arg>
+
+the output file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-nocrypt>
+
+PKCS#8 keys generated or input are normally PKCS#8 EncryptedPrivateKeyInfo
+structures using an appropriate password based encryption algorithm. With
+this option an unencrypted PrivateKeyInfo structure is expected or output.
+This option does not encrypt private keys at all and should only be used
+when absolutely necessary. Certain software such as some versions of Java
+code signing software used unencrypted private keys.
+
+=item B<-nooct>
+
+This option generates RSA private keys in a broken format that some software
+uses. Specifically the private key should be enclosed in a OCTET STRING
+but some software just includes the structure itself without the
+surrounding OCTET STRING.
+
+=item B<-embed>
+
+This option generates DSA keys in a broken format. The DSA parameters are
+embedded inside the PrivateKey structure. In this form the OCTET STRING
+contains an ASN1 SEQUENCE consisting of two structures: a SEQUENCE containing
+the parameters and an ASN1 INTEGER containing the private key.
+
+=item B<-nsdb>
+
+This option generates DSA keys in a broken format compatible with Netscape
+private key databases. The PrivateKey contains a SEQUENCE consisting of
+the public and private keys respectively.
+
+=item B<-v2 alg>
+
+This option enables the use of PKCS#5 v2.0 algorithms. Normally PKCS#8
+private keys are encrypted with the password based encryption algorithm
+called B<pbeWithMD5AndDES-CBC> this uses 56 bit DES encryption but it
+was the strongest encryption algorithm supported in PKCS#5 v1.5. Using 
+the B<-v2> option PKCS#5 v2.0 algorithms are used which can use any
+encryption algorithm such as 168 bit triple DES or 128 bit RC2 however
+not many implementations support PKCS#5 v2.0 yet. If you are just using
+private keys with OpenSSL then this doesn't matter.
+
+The B<alg> argument is the encryption algorithm to use, valid values include
+B<des>, B<des3> and B<rc2>. It is recommended that B<des3> is used.
+
+=item B<-v2prf alg>
+
+This option sets the PRF algorithm to use with PKCS#5 v2.0. A typical value
+values would be B<hmacWithSHA256>. If this option isn't set then the default
+for the cipher is used or B<hmacWithSHA1> if there is no default.
+
+=item B<-v1 alg>
+
+This option specifies a PKCS#5 v1.5 or PKCS#12 algorithm to use. A complete
+list of possible algorithms is included below.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<pkcs8>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The encrypted form of a PEM encode PKCS#8 files uses the following
+headers and footers:
+
+ -----BEGIN ENCRYPTED PRIVATE KEY-----
+ -----END ENCRYPTED PRIVATE KEY-----
+
+The unencrypted form uses:
+
+ -----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----
+ -----END PRIVATE KEY-----
+
+Private keys encrypted using PKCS#5 v2.0 algorithms and high iteration
+counts are more secure that those encrypted using the traditional
+SSLeay compatible formats. So if additional security is considered
+important the keys should be converted.
+
+The default encryption is only 56 bits because this is the encryption
+that most current implementations of PKCS#8 will support.
+
+Some software may use PKCS#12 password based encryption algorithms
+with PKCS#8 format private keys: these are handled automatically
+but there is no option to produce them.
+
+It is possible to write out DER encoded encrypted private keys in
+PKCS#8 format because the encryption details are included at an ASN1
+level whereas the traditional format includes them at a PEM level.
+
+=head1 PKCS#5 v1.5 and PKCS#12 algorithms.
+
+Various algorithms can be used with the B<-v1> command line option,
+including PKCS#5 v1.5 and PKCS#12. These are described in more detail
+below.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<PBE-MD2-DES PBE-MD5-DES>
+
+These algorithms were included in the original PKCS#5 v1.5 specification.
+They only offer 56 bits of protection since they both use DES.
+
+=item B<PBE-SHA1-RC2-64 PBE-MD2-RC2-64 PBE-MD5-RC2-64 PBE-SHA1-DES>
+
+These algorithms are not mentioned in the original PKCS#5 v1.5 specification
+but they use the same key derivation algorithm and are supported by some
+software. They are mentioned in PKCS#5 v2.0. They use either 64 bit RC2 or
+56 bit DES.
+
+=item B<PBE-SHA1-RC4-128 PBE-SHA1-RC4-40 PBE-SHA1-3DES PBE-SHA1-2DES PBE-SHA1-RC2-128 PBE-SHA1-RC2-40>
+
+These algorithms use the PKCS#12 password based encryption algorithm and
+allow strong encryption algorithms like triple DES or 128 bit RC2 to be used.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Convert a private from traditional to PKCS#5 v2.0 format using triple
+DES:
+
+ openssl pkcs8 -in key.pem -topk8 -v2 des3 -out enckey.pem
+
+Convert a private from traditional to PKCS#5 v2.0 format using AES with
+256 bits in CBC mode and B<hmacWithSHA256> PRF:
+
+ openssl pkcs8 -in key.pem -topk8 -v2 aes-256-cbc -v2prf hmacWithSHA256 -out enckey.pem
+
+Convert a private key to PKCS#8 using a PKCS#5 1.5 compatible algorithm
+(DES):
+
+ openssl pkcs8 -in key.pem -topk8 -out enckey.pem
+
+Convert a private key to PKCS#8 using a PKCS#12 compatible algorithm
+(3DES):
+
+ openssl pkcs8 -in key.pem -topk8 -out enckey.pem -v1 PBE-SHA1-3DES
+
+Read a DER unencrypted PKCS#8 format private key:
+
+ openssl pkcs8 -inform DER -nocrypt -in key.der -out key.pem
+
+Convert a private key from any PKCS#8 format to traditional format:
+
+ openssl pkcs8 -in pk8.pem -out key.pem
+
+=head1 STANDARDS
+
+Test vectors from this PKCS#5 v2.0 implementation were posted to the
+pkcs-tng mailing list using triple DES, DES and RC2 with high iteration
+counts, several people confirmed that they could decrypt the private
+keys produced and Therefore it can be assumed that the PKCS#5 v2.0
+implementation is reasonably accurate at least as far as these
+algorithms are concerned.
+
+The format of PKCS#8 DSA (and other) private keys is not well documented:
+it is hidden away in PKCS#11 v2.01, section 11.9. OpenSSL's default DSA
+PKCS#8 private key format complies with this standard.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+There should be an option that prints out the encryption algorithm
+in use and other details such as the iteration count.
+
+PKCS#8 using triple DES and PKCS#5 v2.0 should be the default private
+key format for OpenSSL: for compatibility several of the utilities use
+the old format at present.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<dsa(1)|dsa(1)>, L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>,
+L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)> 
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/pkey.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/pkey.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4851223
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/pkey.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+pkey - public or private key processing tool
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<pkey>
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-passout arg>]
+[B<-cipher>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-text_pub>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-pubin>]
+[B<-pubout>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<pkey> command processes public or private keys. They can be converted
+between various forms and their components printed out.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format DER or PEM.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read a key from or standard input if this
+option is not specified. If the key is encrypted a pass phrase will be
+prompted for.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the input file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename to write a key to or standard output if this
+option is not specified. If any encryption options are set then a pass phrase
+will be prompted for. The output filename should B<not> be the same as the input
+filename.
+
+=item B<-passout password>
+
+the output file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-cipher>
+
+These options encrypt the private key with the supplied cipher. Any algorithm
+name accepted by EVP_get_cipherbyname() is acceptable such as B<des3>.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+prints out the various public or private key components in
+plain text in addition to the encoded version. 
+
+=item B<-text_pub>
+
+print out only public key components even if a private key is being processed.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+do not output the encoded version of the key.
+
+=item B<-pubin>
+
+by default a private key is read from the input file: with this
+option a public key is read instead.
+
+=item B<-pubout>
+
+by default a private key is output: with this option a public
+key will be output instead. This option is automatically set if
+the input is a public key.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<pkey>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+To remove the pass phrase on an RSA private key:
+
+ openssl pkey -in key.pem -out keyout.pem
+
+To encrypt a private key using triple DES:
+
+ openssl pkey -in key.pem -des3 -out keyout.pem
+
+To convert a private key from PEM to DER format: 
+
+ openssl pkey -in key.pem -outform DER -out keyout.der
+
+To print out the components of a private key to standard output:
+
+ openssl pkey -in key.pem -text -noout
+
+To print out the public components of a private key to standard output:
+
+ openssl pkey -in key.pem -text_pub -noout
+
+To just output the public part of a private key:
+
+ openssl pkey -in key.pem -pubout -out pubkey.pem
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<genpkey(1)|genpkey(1)>, L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>, L<pkcs8(1)|pkcs8(1)>,
+L<dsa(1)|dsa(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>, L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)> 
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/pkeyparam.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/pkeyparam.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..154f672
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/pkeyparam.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+pkeyparam - public key algorithm parameter processing tool
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<pkeyparam>
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<pkey> command processes public or private keys. They can be converted
+between various forms and their components printed out.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read parameters from or standard input if
+this option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename to write parameters to or standard output if
+this option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+prints out the parameters in plain text in addition to the encoded version. 
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+do not output the encoded version of the parameters.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<pkeyparam>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLE
+
+Print out text version of parameters:
+
+ openssl pkeyparam -in param.pem -text
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+There are no B<-inform> or B<-outform> options for this command because only
+PEM format is supported because the key type is determined by the PEM headers.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<genpkey(1)|genpkey(1)>, L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>, L<pkcs8(1)|pkcs8(1)>,
+L<dsa(1)|dsa(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>, L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)> 
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/pkeyutl.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/pkeyutl.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5da347c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/pkeyutl.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+pkeyutl - public key algorithm utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<pkeyutl>
+[B<-in file>]
+[B<-out file>]
+[B<-sigfile file>]
+[B<-inkey file>]
+[B<-keyform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-peerkey file>]
+[B<-peerform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-pubin>]
+[B<-certin>]
+[B<-rev>]
+[B<-sign>]
+[B<-verify>]
+[B<-verifyrecover>]
+[B<-encrypt>]
+[B<-decrypt>]
+[B<-derive>]
+[B<-pkeyopt opt:value>]
+[B<-hexdump>]
+[B<-asn1parse>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<pkeyutl> command can be used to perform public key operations using
+any supported algorithm.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read data from or standard input
+if this option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+specifies the output filename to write to or standard output by
+default.
+
+=item B<-inkey file>
+
+the input key file, by default it should be a private key.
+
+=item B<-keyform PEM|DER>
+
+the key format PEM, DER or ENGINE.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the input key password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+
+=item B<-peerkey file>
+
+the peer key file, used by key derivation (agreement) operations.
+
+=item B<-peerform PEM|DER>
+
+the peer key format PEM, DER or ENGINE.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<pkeyutl>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+
+=item B<-pubin>
+
+the input file is a public key. 
+
+=item B<-certin>
+
+the input is a certificate containing a public key. 
+
+=item B<-rev>
+
+reverse the order of the input buffer. This is useful for some libraries
+(such as CryptoAPI) which represent the buffer in little endian format.
+
+=item B<-sign>
+
+sign the input data and output the signed result. This requires
+a private key.
+
+=item B<-verify>
+
+verify the input data against the signature file and indicate if the
+verification succeeded or failed.
+
+=item B<-verifyrecover>
+
+verify the input data and output the recovered data.
+
+=item B<-encrypt>
+
+encrypt the input data using a public key.
+
+=item B<-decrypt>
+
+decrypt the input data using a private key.
+
+=item B<-derive>
+
+derive a shared secret using the peer key.
+
+=item B<-hexdump>
+
+hex dump the output data.
+
+=item B<-asn1parse>
+
+asn1parse the output data, this is useful when combined with the
+B<-verifyrecover> option when an ASN1 structure is signed.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The operations and options supported vary according to the key algorithm
+and its implementation. The OpenSSL operations and options are indicated below.
+
+Unless otherwise mentioned all algorithms support the B<digest:alg> option
+which specifies the digest in use for sign, verify and verifyrecover operations.
+The value B<alg> should represent a digest name as used in the
+EVP_get_digestbyname() function for example B<sha1>.
+This value is used only for sanity-checking the lengths of data passed in to
+the B<pkeyutl> and for creating the structures that make up the signature
+(e.g. B<DigestInfo> in RSASSA PKCS#1 v1.5 signatures).
+In case of RSA, ECDSA and DSA signatures, this utility
+will not perform hashing on input data but rather use the data directly as
+input of signature algorithm. Depending on key type, signature type and mode
+of padding, the maximum acceptable lengths of input data differ. In general,
+with RSA the signed data can't be longer than the key modulus, in case of ECDSA
+and DSA the data shouldn't be longer than field size, otherwise it will be
+silently truncated to field size.
+
+In other words, if the value of digest is B<sha1> the input should be 20 bytes
+long binary encoding of SHA-1 hash function output.
+
+=head1 RSA ALGORITHM
+
+The RSA algorithm supports encrypt, decrypt, sign, verify and verifyrecover
+operations in general. Some padding modes only support some of these 
+operations however.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item -B<rsa_padding_mode:mode>
+
+This sets the RSA padding mode. Acceptable values for B<mode> are B<pkcs1> for
+PKCS#1 padding, B<sslv23> for SSLv23 padding, B<none> for no padding, B<oaep>
+for B<OAEP> mode, B<x931> for X9.31 mode and B<pss> for PSS.
+
+In PKCS#1 padding if the message digest is not set then the supplied data is 
+signed or verified directly instead of using a B<DigestInfo> structure. If a
+digest is set then the a B<DigestInfo> structure is used and its the length
+must correspond to the digest type.
+
+For B<oeap> mode only encryption and decryption is supported.
+
+For B<x931> if the digest type is set it is used to format the block data
+otherwise the first byte is used to specify the X9.31 digest ID. Sign,
+verify and verifyrecover are can be performed in this mode.
+
+For B<pss> mode only sign and verify are supported and the digest type must be
+specified.
+
+=item B<rsa_pss_saltlen:len>
+
+For B<pss> mode only this option specifies the salt length. Two special values
+are supported: -1 sets the salt length to the digest length. When signing -2
+sets the salt length to the maximum permissible value. When verifying -2 causes
+the salt length to be automatically determined based on the B<PSS> block
+structure.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 DSA ALGORITHM
+
+The DSA algorithm supports signing and verification operations only. Currently
+there are no additional options other than B<digest>. Only the SHA1
+digest can be used and this digest is assumed by default.
+
+=head1 DH ALGORITHM
+
+The DH algorithm only supports the derivation operation and no additional
+options.
+
+=head1 EC ALGORITHM
+
+The EC algorithm supports sign, verify and derive operations. The sign and
+verify operations use ECDSA and derive uses ECDH. Currently there are no
+additional options other than B<digest>. Only the SHA1 digest can be used and
+this digest is assumed by default.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Sign some data using a private key:
+
+ openssl pkeyutl -sign -in file -inkey key.pem -out sig
+
+Recover the signed data (e.g. if an RSA key is used):
+
+ openssl pkeyutl -verifyrecover -in sig -inkey key.pem
+
+Verify the signature (e.g. a DSA key):
+
+ openssl pkeyutl -verify -in file -sigfile sig -inkey key.pem
+
+Sign data using a message digest value (this is currently only valid for RSA):
+
+ openssl pkeyutl -sign -in file -inkey key.pem -out sig -pkeyopt digest:sha256
+
+Derive a shared secret value:
+
+ openssl pkeyutl -derive -inkey key.pem -peerkey pubkey.pem -out secret
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<genpkey(1)|genpkey(1)>, L<pkey(1)|pkey(1)>, L<rsautl(1)|rsautl(1)>
+L<dgst(1)|dgst(1)>, L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/rand.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/rand.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1d213e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/rand.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+rand - generate pseudo-random bytes
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl rand>
+[B<-out> I<file>]
+[B<-rand> I<file(s)>]
+[B<-base64>]
+[B<-hex>]
+I<num>
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<rand> command outputs I<num> pseudo-random bytes after seeding
+the random number generator once.  As in other B<openssl> command
+line tools, PRNG seeding uses the file I<$HOME/>B<.rnd> or B<.rnd>
+in addition to the files given in the B<-rand> option.  A new
+I<$HOME>/B<.rnd> or B<.rnd> file will be written back if enough
+seeding was obtained from these sources.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-out> I<file>
+
+Write to I<file> instead of standard output.
+
+=item B<-rand> I<file(s)>
+
+Use specified file or files or EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>)
+for seeding the random number generator.
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<-base64>
+
+Perform base64 encoding on the output.
+
+=item B<-hex>
+
+Show the output as a hex string.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<RAND_bytes(3)|RAND_bytes(3)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/req.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/req.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30653e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/req.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,680 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+req - PKCS#10 certificate request and certificate generating utility.
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<req>
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-passout arg>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-pubkey>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-verify>]
+[B<-modulus>]
+[B<-new>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<-newkey rsa:bits>]
+[B<-newkey alg:file>]
+[B<-nodes>]
+[B<-key filename>]
+[B<-keyform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-keyout filename>]
+[B<-keygen_engine id>]
+[B<-[digest]>]
+[B<-config filename>]
+[B<-multivalue-rdn>]
+[B<-x509>]
+[B<-days n>]
+[B<-set_serial n>]
+[B<-asn1-kludge>]
+[B<-no-asn1-kludge>]
+[B<-newhdr>]
+[B<-extensions section>]
+[B<-reqexts section>]
+[B<-utf8>]
+[B<-nameopt>]
+[B<-reqopt>]
+[B<-subject>]
+[B<-subj arg>]
+[B<-batch>]
+[B<-verbose>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<req> command primarily creates and processes certificate requests
+in PKCS#10 format. It can additionally create self signed certificates
+for use as root CAs for example.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. The B<DER> option uses an ASN1 DER encoded
+form compatible with the PKCS#10. The B<PEM> form is the default format: it
+consists of the B<DER> format base64 encoded with additional header and
+footer lines.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read a request from or standard input
+if this option is not specified. A request is only read if the creation
+options (B<-new> and B<-newkey>) are not specified.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the input file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename to write to or standard output by
+default.
+
+=item B<-passout arg>
+
+the output file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+prints out the certificate request in text form.
+
+=item B<-subject>
+
+prints out the request subject (or certificate subject if B<-x509> is
+specified)
+
+=item B<-pubkey>
+
+outputs the public key.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+this option prevents output of the encoded version of the request.
+
+=item B<-modulus>
+
+this option prints out the value of the modulus of the public key
+contained in the request.
+
+=item B<-verify>
+
+verifies the signature on the request.
+
+=item B<-new>
+
+this option generates a new certificate request. It will prompt
+the user for the relevant field values. The actual fields
+prompted for and their maximum and minimum sizes are specified
+in the configuration file and any requested extensions.
+
+If the B<-key> option is not used it will generate a new RSA private
+key using information specified in the configuration file.
+
+=item B<-subj arg>
+
+Replaces subject field of input request with specified data and outputs
+modified request. The arg must be formatted as
+I</type0=value0/type1=value1/type2=...>,
+characters may be escaped by \ (backslash), no spaces are skipped.
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<-newkey arg>
+
+this option creates a new certificate request and a new private
+key. The argument takes one of several forms. B<rsa:nbits>, where
+B<nbits> is the number of bits, generates an RSA key B<nbits>
+in size. If B<nbits> is omitted, i.e. B<-newkey rsa> specified,
+the default key size, specified in the configuration file is used.
+
+All other algorithms support the B<-newkey alg:file> form, where file may be
+an algorithm parameter file, created by the B<genpkey -genparam> command
+or and X.509 certificate for a key with approriate algorithm.
+
+B<param:file> generates a key using the parameter file or certificate B<file>,
+the algorithm is determined by the parameters. B<algname:file> use algorithm
+B<algname> and parameter file B<file>: the two algorithms must match or an
+error occurs. B<algname> just uses algorithm B<algname>, and parameters,
+if neccessary should be specified via B<-pkeyopt> parameter.
+
+B<dsa:filename> generates a DSA key using the parameters
+in the file B<filename>. B<ec:filename> generates EC key (usable both with
+ECDSA or ECDH algorithms), B<gost2001:filename> generates GOST R
+34.10-2001 key (requires B<ccgost> engine configured in the configuration
+file). If just B<gost2001> is specified a parameter set should be
+specified by B<-pkeyopt paramset:X>
+
+
+=item B<-pkeyopt opt:value>
+
+set the public key algorithm option B<opt> to B<value>. The precise set of
+options supported depends on the public key algorithm used and its
+implementation. See B<KEY GENERATION OPTIONS> in the B<genpkey> manual page
+for more details.
+
+=item B<-key filename>
+
+This specifies the file to read the private key from. It also
+accepts PKCS#8 format private keys for PEM format files.
+
+=item B<-keyform PEM|DER>
+
+the format of the private key file specified in the B<-key>
+argument. PEM is the default.
+
+=item B<-keyout filename>
+
+this gives the filename to write the newly created private key to.
+If this option is not specified then the filename present in the
+configuration file is used.
+
+=item B<-nodes>
+
+if this option is specified then if a private key is created it
+will not be encrypted.
+
+=item B<-[digest]>
+
+this specifies the message digest to sign the request with (such as
+B<-md5>, B<-sha1>). This overrides the digest algorithm specified in
+the configuration file.
+
+Some public key algorithms may override this choice. For instance, DSA
+signatures always use SHA1, GOST R 34.10 signatures always use
+GOST R 34.11-94 (B<-md_gost94>).
+
+=item B<-config filename>
+
+this allows an alternative configuration file to be specified,
+this overrides the compile time filename or any specified in
+the B<OPENSSL_CONF> environment variable.
+
+=item B<-subj arg>
+
+sets subject name for new request or supersedes the subject name
+when processing a request.
+The arg must be formatted as I</type0=value0/type1=value1/type2=...>,
+characters may be escaped by \ (backslash), no spaces are skipped.
+
+=item B<-multivalue-rdn>
+
+this option causes the -subj argument to be interpreted with full
+support for multivalued RDNs. Example:
+
+I</DC=org/DC=OpenSSL/DC=users/UID=123456+CN=John Doe>
+
+If -multi-rdn is not used then the UID value is I<123456+CN=John Doe>.
+
+=item B<-x509>
+
+this option outputs a self signed certificate instead of a certificate
+request. This is typically used to generate a test certificate or
+a self signed root CA. The extensions added to the certificate
+(if any) are specified in the configuration file. Unless specified
+using the B<set_serial> option, a large random number will be used for
+the serial number.
+
+=item B<-days n>
+
+when the B<-x509> option is being used this specifies the number of
+days to certify the certificate for. The default is 30 days.
+
+=item B<-set_serial n>
+
+serial number to use when outputting a self signed certificate. This
+may be specified as a decimal value or a hex value if preceded by B<0x>.
+It is possible to use negative serial numbers but this is not recommended.
+
+=item B<-extensions section>
+
+=item B<-reqexts section>
+
+these options specify alternative sections to include certificate
+extensions (if the B<-x509> option is present) or certificate
+request extensions. This allows several different sections to
+be used in the same configuration file to specify requests for
+a variety of purposes.
+
+=item B<-utf8>
+
+this option causes field values to be interpreted as UTF8 strings, by 
+default they are interpreted as ASCII. This means that the field
+values, whether prompted from a terminal or obtained from a
+configuration file, must be valid UTF8 strings.
+
+=item B<-nameopt option>
+
+option which determines how the subject or issuer names are displayed. The
+B<option> argument can be a single option or multiple options separated by
+commas.  Alternatively the B<-nameopt> switch may be used more than once to
+set multiple options. See the L<x509(1)|x509(1)> manual page for details.
+
+=item B<-reqopt>
+
+customise the output format used with B<-text>. The B<option> argument can be
+a single option or multiple options separated by commas. 
+
+See discission of the  B<-certopt> parameter in the L<B<x509>|x509(1)>
+command.
+
+
+=item B<-asn1-kludge>
+
+by default the B<req> command outputs certificate requests containing
+no attributes in the correct PKCS#10 format. However certain CAs will only
+accept requests containing no attributes in an invalid form: this
+option produces this invalid format.
+
+More precisely the B<Attributes> in a PKCS#10 certificate request
+are defined as a B<SET OF Attribute>. They are B<not OPTIONAL> so
+if no attributes are present then they should be encoded as an
+empty B<SET OF>. The invalid form does not include the empty
+B<SET OF> whereas the correct form does.
+
+It should be noted that very few CAs still require the use of this option.
+
+=item B<-no-asn1-kludge>
+
+Reverses effect of B<-asn1-kludge>
+
+=item B<-newhdr>
+
+Adds the word B<NEW> to the PEM file header and footer lines on the outputted
+request. Some software (Netscape certificate server) and some CAs need this.
+
+=item B<-batch>
+
+non-interactive mode.
+
+=item B<-verbose>
+
+print extra details about the operations being performed.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<req>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=item B<-keygen_engine id>
+
+specifies an engine (by its unique B<id> string) which would be used
+for key generation operations.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 CONFIGURATION FILE FORMAT
+
+The configuration options are specified in the B<req> section of
+the configuration file. As with all configuration files if no
+value is specified in the specific section (i.e. B<req>) then
+the initial unnamed or B<default> section is searched too.
+
+The options available are described in detail below.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<input_password output_password>
+
+The passwords for the input private key file (if present) and
+the output private key file (if one will be created). The
+command line options B<passin> and B<passout> override the
+configuration file values.
+
+=item B<default_bits>
+
+Specifies the default key size in bits.
+
+This option is used in conjunction with the B<-new> option to generate
+a new key. It can be overridden by specifying an explicit key size in
+the B<-newkey> option. The smallest accepted key size is 512 bits. If
+no key size is specified then 2048 bits is used.
+
+=item B<default_keyfile>
+
+This is the default filename to write a private key to. If not
+specified the key is written to standard output. This can be
+overridden by the B<-keyout> option.
+
+=item B<oid_file>
+
+This specifies a file containing additional B<OBJECT IDENTIFIERS>.
+Each line of the file should consist of the numerical form of the
+object identifier followed by white space then the short name followed
+by white space and finally the long name. 
+
+=item B<oid_section>
+
+This specifies a section in the configuration file containing extra
+object identifiers. Each line should consist of the short name of the
+object identifier followed by B<=> and the numerical form. The short
+and long names are the same when this option is used.
+
+=item B<RANDFILE>
+
+This specifies a filename in which random number seed information is
+placed and read from, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+It is used for private key generation.
+
+=item B<encrypt_key>
+
+If this is set to B<no> then if a private key is generated it is
+B<not> encrypted. This is equivalent to the B<-nodes> command line
+option. For compatibility B<encrypt_rsa_key> is an equivalent option.
+
+=item B<default_md>
+
+This option specifies the digest algorithm to use. Possible values
+include B<md5 sha1 mdc2>. If not present then MD5 is used. This
+option can be overridden on the command line.
+
+=item B<string_mask>
+
+This option masks out the use of certain string types in certain
+fields. Most users will not need to change this option.
+
+It can be set to several values B<default> which is also the default
+option uses PrintableStrings, T61Strings and BMPStrings if the 
+B<pkix> value is used then only PrintableStrings and BMPStrings will
+be used. This follows the PKIX recommendation in RFC2459. If the
+B<utf8only> option is used then only UTF8Strings will be used: this
+is the PKIX recommendation in RFC2459 after 2003. Finally the B<nombstr>
+option just uses PrintableStrings and T61Strings: certain software has
+problems with BMPStrings and UTF8Strings: in particular Netscape.
+
+=item B<req_extensions>
+
+this specifies the configuration file section containing a list of
+extensions to add to the certificate request. It can be overridden
+by the B<-reqexts> command line switch. See the 
+L<x509v3_config(5)|x509v3_config(5)> manual page for details of the
+extension section format.
+
+=item B<x509_extensions>
+
+this specifies the configuration file section containing a list of
+extensions to add to certificate generated when the B<-x509> switch
+is used. It can be overridden by the B<-extensions> command line switch.
+
+=item B<prompt>
+
+if set to the value B<no> this disables prompting of certificate fields
+and just takes values from the config file directly. It also changes the
+expected format of the B<distinguished_name> and B<attributes> sections.
+
+=item B<utf8>
+
+if set to the value B<yes> then field values to be interpreted as UTF8
+strings, by default they are interpreted as ASCII. This means that
+the field values, whether prompted from a terminal or obtained from a
+configuration file, must be valid UTF8 strings.
+
+=item B<attributes>
+
+this specifies the section containing any request attributes: its format
+is the same as B<distinguished_name>. Typically these may contain the
+challengePassword or unstructuredName types. They are currently ignored
+by OpenSSL's request signing utilities but some CAs might want them.
+
+=item B<distinguished_name>
+
+This specifies the section containing the distinguished name fields to
+prompt for when generating a certificate or certificate request. The format
+is described in the next section.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 DISTINGUISHED NAME AND ATTRIBUTE SECTION FORMAT
+
+There are two separate formats for the distinguished name and attribute
+sections. If the B<prompt> option is set to B<no> then these sections
+just consist of field names and values: for example,
+
+ CN=My Name
+ OU=My Organization
+ emailAddress=someone@somewhere.org
+
+This allows external programs (e.g. GUI based) to generate a template file
+with all the field names and values and just pass it to B<req>. An example
+of this kind of configuration file is contained in the B<EXAMPLES> section.
+
+Alternatively if the B<prompt> option is absent or not set to B<no> then the
+file contains field prompting information. It consists of lines of the form:
+
+ fieldName="prompt"
+ fieldName_default="default field value"
+ fieldName_min= 2
+ fieldName_max= 4
+
+"fieldName" is the field name being used, for example commonName (or CN).
+The "prompt" string is used to ask the user to enter the relevant
+details. If the user enters nothing then the default value is used if no
+default value is present then the field is omitted. A field can
+still be omitted if a default value is present if the user just
+enters the '.' character.
+
+The number of characters entered must be between the fieldName_min and
+fieldName_max limits: there may be additional restrictions based
+on the field being used (for example countryName can only ever be
+two characters long and must fit in a PrintableString).
+
+Some fields (such as organizationName) can be used more than once
+in a DN. This presents a problem because configuration files will
+not recognize the same name occurring twice. To avoid this problem
+if the fieldName contains some characters followed by a full stop
+they will be ignored. So for example a second organizationName can
+be input by calling it "1.organizationName".
+
+The actual permitted field names are any object identifier short or
+long names. These are compiled into OpenSSL and include the usual
+values such as commonName, countryName, localityName, organizationName,
+organizationalUnitName, stateOrProvinceName. Additionally emailAddress
+is include as well as name, surname, givenName initials and dnQualifier.
+
+Additional object identifiers can be defined with the B<oid_file> or
+B<oid_section> options in the configuration file. Any additional fields
+will be treated as though they were a DirectoryString.
+
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Examine and verify certificate request:
+
+ openssl req -in req.pem -text -verify -noout
+
+Create a private key and then generate a certificate request from it:
+
+ openssl genrsa -out key.pem 2048
+ openssl req -new -key key.pem -out req.pem
+
+The same but just using req:
+
+ openssl req -newkey rsa:2048 -keyout key.pem -out req.pem
+
+Generate a self signed root certificate:
+
+ openssl req -x509 -newkey rsa:2048 -keyout key.pem -out req.pem
+
+Example of a file pointed to by the B<oid_file> option:
+
+ 1.2.3.4	shortName	A longer Name
+ 1.2.3.6	otherName	Other longer Name
+
+Example of a section pointed to by B<oid_section> making use of variable
+expansion:
+
+ testoid1=1.2.3.5
+ testoid2=${testoid1}.6
+
+Sample configuration file prompting for field values:
+
+ [ req ]
+ default_bits		= 2048
+ default_keyfile 	= privkey.pem
+ distinguished_name	= req_distinguished_name
+ attributes		= req_attributes
+ x509_extensions	= v3_ca
+
+ dirstring_type = nobmp
+
+ [ req_distinguished_name ]
+ countryName			= Country Name (2 letter code)
+ countryName_default		= AU
+ countryName_min		= 2
+ countryName_max		= 2
+
+ localityName			= Locality Name (eg, city)
+
+ organizationalUnitName		= Organizational Unit Name (eg, section)
+
+ commonName			= Common Name (eg, YOUR name)
+ commonName_max			= 64
+
+ emailAddress			= Email Address
+ emailAddress_max		= 40
+
+ [ req_attributes ]
+ challengePassword		= A challenge password
+ challengePassword_min		= 4
+ challengePassword_max		= 20
+
+ [ v3_ca ]
+
+ subjectKeyIdentifier=hash
+ authorityKeyIdentifier=keyid:always,issuer:always
+ basicConstraints = CA:true
+
+Sample configuration containing all field values:
+
+
+ RANDFILE		= $ENV::HOME/.rnd
+
+ [ req ]
+ default_bits		= 2048
+ default_keyfile 	= keyfile.pem
+ distinguished_name	= req_distinguished_name
+ attributes		= req_attributes
+ prompt			= no
+ output_password	= mypass
+
+ [ req_distinguished_name ]
+ C			= GB
+ ST			= Test State or Province
+ L			= Test Locality
+ O			= Organization Name
+ OU			= Organizational Unit Name
+ CN			= Common Name
+ emailAddress		= test@email.address
+
+ [ req_attributes ]
+ challengePassword		= A challenge password
+
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The header and footer lines in the B<PEM> format are normally:
+
+ -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
+ -----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
+
+some software (some versions of Netscape certificate server) instead needs:
+
+ -----BEGIN NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
+ -----END NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
+
+which is produced with the B<-newhdr> option but is otherwise compatible.
+Either form is accepted transparently on input.
+
+The certificate requests generated by B<Xenroll> with MSIE have extensions
+added. It includes the B<keyUsage> extension which determines the type of
+key (signature only or general purpose) and any additional OIDs entered
+by the script in an extendedKeyUsage extension.
+
+=head1 DIAGNOSTICS
+
+The following messages are frequently asked about:
+
+	Using configuration from /some/path/openssl.cnf
+	Unable to load config info
+
+This is followed some time later by...
+
+	unable to find 'distinguished_name' in config
+	problems making Certificate Request
+
+The first error message is the clue: it can't find the configuration
+file! Certain operations (like examining a certificate request) don't
+need a configuration file so its use isn't enforced. Generation of
+certificates or requests however does need a configuration file. This
+could be regarded as a bug.
+
+Another puzzling message is this:
+
+        Attributes:
+            a0:00
+
+this is displayed when no attributes are present and the request includes
+the correct empty B<SET OF> structure (the DER encoding of which is 0xa0
+0x00). If you just see:
+
+        Attributes:
+
+then the B<SET OF> is missing and the encoding is technically invalid (but
+it is tolerated). See the description of the command line option B<-asn1-kludge>
+for more information.
+
+=head1 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+
+The variable B<OPENSSL_CONF> if defined allows an alternative configuration
+file location to be specified, it will be overridden by the B<-config> command
+line switch if it is present. For compatibility reasons the B<SSLEAY_CONF>
+environment variable serves the same purpose but its use is discouraged.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+OpenSSL's handling of T61Strings (aka TeletexStrings) is broken: it effectively
+treats them as ISO-8859-1 (Latin 1), Netscape and MSIE have similar behaviour.
+This can cause problems if you need characters that aren't available in
+PrintableStrings and you don't want to or can't use BMPStrings.
+
+As a consequence of the T61String handling the only correct way to represent
+accented characters in OpenSSL is to use a BMPString: unfortunately Netscape
+currently chokes on these. If you have to use accented characters with Netscape
+and MSIE then you currently need to use the invalid T61String form.
+
+The current prompting is not very friendly. It doesn't allow you to confirm what
+you've just entered. Other things like extensions in certificate requests are
+statically defined in the configuration file. Some of these: like an email
+address in subjectAltName should be input by the user.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<x509(1)|x509(1)>, L<ca(1)|ca(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>,
+L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)>, L<config(5)|config(5)>,
+L<x509v3_config(5)|x509v3_config(5)> 
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/rsa.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/rsa.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21cbf8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/rsa.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+rsa - RSA key processing tool
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<rsa>
+[B<-inform PEM|NET|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|NET|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-passout arg>]
+[B<-sgckey>]
+[B<-aes128>]
+[B<-aes192>]
+[B<-aes256>]
+[B<-camellia128>]
+[B<-camellia192>]
+[B<-camellia256>]
+[B<-des>]
+[B<-des3>]
+[B<-idea>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-modulus>]
+[B<-check>]
+[B<-pubin>]
+[B<-pubout>]
+[B<-RSAPublicKey_in>]
+[B<-RSAPublicKey_out>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<rsa> command processes RSA keys. They can be converted between various
+forms and their components printed out. B<Note> this command uses the
+traditional SSLeay compatible format for private key encryption: newer
+applications should use the more secure PKCS#8 format using the B<pkcs8>
+utility.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|NET|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. The B<DER> option uses an ASN1 DER encoded
+form compatible with the PKCS#1 RSAPrivateKey or SubjectPublicKeyInfo format.
+The B<PEM> form is the default format: it consists of the B<DER> format base64
+encoded with additional header and footer lines. On input PKCS#8 format private
+keys are also accepted. The B<NET> form is a format is described in the B<NOTES>
+section.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|NET|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read a key from or standard input if this
+option is not specified. If the key is encrypted a pass phrase will be
+prompted for.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the input file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename to write a key to or standard output if this
+option is not specified. If any encryption options are set then a pass phrase
+will be prompted for. The output filename should B<not> be the same as the input
+filename.
+
+=item B<-passout password>
+
+the output file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-sgckey>
+
+use the modified NET algorithm used with some versions of Microsoft IIS and SGC
+keys.
+
+=item B<-aes128|-aes192|-aes256|-camellia128|-camellia192|-camellia256|-des|-des3|-idea>
+
+These options encrypt the private key with the specified
+cipher before outputting it. A pass phrase is prompted for.
+If none of these options is specified the key is written in plain text. This
+means that using the B<rsa> utility to read in an encrypted key with no
+encryption option can be used to remove the pass phrase from a key, or by
+setting the encryption options it can be use to add or change the pass phrase.
+These options can only be used with PEM format output files.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+prints out the various public or private key components in
+plain text in addition to the encoded version. 
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+this option prevents output of the encoded version of the key.
+
+=item B<-modulus>
+
+this option prints out the value of the modulus of the key.
+
+=item B<-check>
+
+this option checks the consistency of an RSA private key.
+
+=item B<-pubin>
+
+by default a private key is read from the input file: with this
+option a public key is read instead.
+
+=item B<-pubout>
+
+by default a private key is output: with this option a public
+key will be output instead. This option is automatically set if
+the input is a public key.
+
+=item B<-RSAPublicKey_in>, B<-RSAPublicKey_out>
+
+like B<-pubin> and B<-pubout> except B<RSAPublicKey> format is used instead.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<rsa>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The PEM private key format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
+ -----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
+
+The PEM public key format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN PUBLIC KEY-----
+ -----END PUBLIC KEY-----
+
+The PEM B<RSAPublicKey> format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN RSA PUBLIC KEY-----
+ -----END RSA PUBLIC KEY-----
+
+The B<NET> form is a format compatible with older Netscape servers
+and Microsoft IIS .key files, this uses unsalted RC4 for its encryption.
+It is not very secure and so should only be used when necessary.
+
+Some newer version of IIS have additional data in the exported .key
+files. To use these with the utility, view the file with a binary editor
+and look for the string "private-key", then trace back to the byte
+sequence 0x30, 0x82 (this is an ASN1 SEQUENCE). Copy all the data
+from this point onwards to another file and use that as the input
+to the B<rsa> utility with the B<-inform NET> option. If you get
+an error after entering the password try the B<-sgckey> option.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+To remove the pass phrase on an RSA private key:
+
+ openssl rsa -in key.pem -out keyout.pem
+
+To encrypt a private key using triple DES:
+
+ openssl rsa -in key.pem -des3 -out keyout.pem
+
+To convert a private key from PEM to DER format: 
+
+ openssl rsa -in key.pem -outform DER -out keyout.der
+
+To print out the components of a private key to standard output:
+
+ openssl rsa -in key.pem -text -noout
+
+To just output the public part of a private key:
+
+ openssl rsa -in key.pem -pubout -out pubkey.pem
+
+Output the public part of a private key in B<RSAPublicKey> format:
+
+ openssl rsa -in key.pem -RSAPublicKey_out -out pubkey.pem
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The command line password arguments don't currently work with
+B<NET> format.
+
+There should be an option that automatically handles .key files,
+without having to manually edit them.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<pkcs8(1)|pkcs8(1)>, L<dsa(1)|dsa(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>,
+L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)> 
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/rsautl.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/rsautl.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a498c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/rsautl.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+rsautl - RSA utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<rsautl>
+[B<-in file>]
+[B<-out file>]
+[B<-inkey file>]
+[B<-pubin>]
+[B<-certin>]
+[B<-sign>]
+[B<-verify>]
+[B<-encrypt>]
+[B<-decrypt>]
+[B<-pkcs>]
+[B<-ssl>]
+[B<-raw>]
+[B<-hexdump>]
+[B<-asn1parse>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<rsautl> command can be used to sign, verify, encrypt and decrypt
+data using the RSA algorithm.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read data from or standard input
+if this option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+specifies the output filename to write to or standard output by
+default.
+
+=item B<-inkey file>
+
+the input key file, by default it should be an RSA private key.
+
+=item B<-pubin>
+
+the input file is an RSA public key. 
+
+=item B<-certin>
+
+the input is a certificate containing an RSA public key. 
+
+=item B<-sign>
+
+sign the input data and output the signed result. This requires
+and RSA private key.
+
+=item B<-verify>
+
+verify the input data and output the recovered data.
+
+=item B<-encrypt>
+
+encrypt the input data using an RSA public key.
+
+=item B<-decrypt>
+
+decrypt the input data using an RSA private key.
+
+=item B<-pkcs, -oaep, -ssl, -raw>
+
+the padding to use: PKCS#1 v1.5 (the default), PKCS#1 OAEP,
+special padding used in SSL v2 backwards compatible handshakes,
+or no padding, respectively.
+For signatures, only B<-pkcs> and B<-raw> can be used.
+
+=item B<-hexdump>
+
+hex dump the output data.
+
+=item B<-asn1parse>
+
+asn1parse the output data, this is useful when combined with the
+B<-verify> option.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+B<rsautl> because it uses the RSA algorithm directly can only be
+used to sign or verify small pieces of data.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Sign some data using a private key:
+
+ openssl rsautl -sign -in file -inkey key.pem -out sig
+
+Recover the signed data
+
+ openssl rsautl -verify -in sig -inkey key.pem
+
+Examine the raw signed data:
+
+ openssl rsautl -verify -in file -inkey key.pem -raw -hexdump
+
+ 0000 - 00 01 ff ff ff ff ff ff-ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff   ................
+ 0010 - ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff-ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff   ................
+ 0020 - ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff-ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff   ................
+ 0030 - ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff-ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff   ................
+ 0040 - ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff-ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff   ................
+ 0050 - ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff-ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff   ................
+ 0060 - ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff-ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff   ................
+ 0070 - ff ff ff ff 00 68 65 6c-6c 6f 20 77 6f 72 6c 64   .....hello world
+
+The PKCS#1 block formatting is evident from this. If this was done using
+encrypt and decrypt the block would have been of type 2 (the second byte)
+and random padding data visible instead of the 0xff bytes.
+
+It is possible to analyse the signature of certificates using this
+utility in conjunction with B<asn1parse>. Consider the self signed
+example in certs/pca-cert.pem . Running B<asn1parse> as follows yields:
+
+ openssl asn1parse -in pca-cert.pem
+
+    0:d=0  hl=4 l= 742 cons: SEQUENCE          
+    4:d=1  hl=4 l= 591 cons:  SEQUENCE          
+    8:d=2  hl=2 l=   3 cons:   cont [ 0 ]        
+   10:d=3  hl=2 l=   1 prim:    INTEGER           :02
+   13:d=2  hl=2 l=   1 prim:   INTEGER           :00
+   16:d=2  hl=2 l=  13 cons:   SEQUENCE          
+   18:d=3  hl=2 l=   9 prim:    OBJECT            :md5WithRSAEncryption
+   29:d=3  hl=2 l=   0 prim:    NULL              
+   31:d=2  hl=2 l=  92 cons:   SEQUENCE          
+   33:d=3  hl=2 l=  11 cons:    SET               
+   35:d=4  hl=2 l=   9 cons:     SEQUENCE          
+   37:d=5  hl=2 l=   3 prim:      OBJECT            :countryName
+   42:d=5  hl=2 l=   2 prim:      PRINTABLESTRING   :AU
+  ....
+  599:d=1  hl=2 l=  13 cons:  SEQUENCE          
+  601:d=2  hl=2 l=   9 prim:   OBJECT            :md5WithRSAEncryption
+  612:d=2  hl=2 l=   0 prim:   NULL              
+  614:d=1  hl=3 l= 129 prim:  BIT STRING        
+
+
+The final BIT STRING contains the actual signature. It can be extracted with:
+
+ openssl asn1parse -in pca-cert.pem -out sig -noout -strparse 614
+
+The certificate public key can be extracted with:
+ 
+ openssl x509 -in test/testx509.pem -pubkey -noout >pubkey.pem
+
+The signature can be analysed with:
+
+ openssl rsautl -in sig -verify -asn1parse -inkey pubkey.pem -pubin
+
+    0:d=0  hl=2 l=  32 cons: SEQUENCE          
+    2:d=1  hl=2 l=  12 cons:  SEQUENCE          
+    4:d=2  hl=2 l=   8 prim:   OBJECT            :md5
+   14:d=2  hl=2 l=   0 prim:   NULL              
+   16:d=1  hl=2 l=  16 prim:  OCTET STRING      
+      0000 - f3 46 9e aa 1a 4a 73 c9-37 ea 93 00 48 25 08 b5   .F...Js.7...H%..
+
+This is the parsed version of an ASN1 DigestInfo structure. It can be seen that
+the digest used was md5. The actual part of the certificate that was signed can
+be extracted with:
+
+ openssl asn1parse -in pca-cert.pem -out tbs -noout -strparse 4
+
+and its digest computed with:
+
+ openssl md5 -c tbs
+ MD5(tbs)= f3:46:9e:aa:1a:4a:73:c9:37:ea:93:00:48:25:08:b5
+
+which it can be seen agrees with the recovered value above.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<dgst(1)|dgst(1)>, L<rsa(1)|rsa(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/s_client.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/s_client.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29675dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/s_client.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,370 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+s_client - SSL/TLS client program
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<s_client>
+[B<-connect host:port>]
+[B<-servername name>]
+[B<-verify depth>]
+[B<-verify_return_error>]
+[B<-cert filename>]
+[B<-certform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-key filename>]
+[B<-keyform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-pass arg>]
+[B<-CApath directory>]
+[B<-CAfile filename>]
+[B<-no_alt_chains>]
+[B<-reconnect>]
+[B<-pause>]
+[B<-showcerts>]
+[B<-debug>]
+[B<-msg>]
+[B<-nbio_test>]
+[B<-state>]
+[B<-nbio>]
+[B<-crlf>]
+[B<-ign_eof>]
+[B<-no_ign_eof>]
+[B<-quiet>]
+[B<-ssl2>]
+[B<-ssl3>]
+[B<-tls1>]
+[B<-no_ssl2>]
+[B<-no_ssl3>]
+[B<-no_tls1>]
+[B<-no_tls1_1>]
+[B<-no_tls1_2>]
+[B<-fallback_scsv>]
+[B<-bugs>]
+[B<-cipher cipherlist>]
+[B<-serverpref>]
+[B<-starttls protocol>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+[B<-tlsextdebug>]
+[B<-no_ticket>]
+[B<-sess_out filename>]
+[B<-sess_in filename>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<-serverinfo types>]
+[B<-status>]
+[B<-alpn protocols>]
+[B<-nextprotoneg protocols>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<s_client> command implements a generic SSL/TLS client which connects
+to a remote host using SSL/TLS. It is a I<very> useful diagnostic tool for
+SSL servers.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-connect host:port>
+
+This specifies the host and optional port to connect to. If not specified
+then an attempt is made to connect to the local host on port 4433.
+
+=item B<-servername name>
+
+Set the TLS SNI (Server Name Indication) extension in the ClientHello message.
+
+=item B<-cert certname>
+
+The certificate to use, if one is requested by the server. The default is
+not to use a certificate.
+
+=item B<-certform format>
+
+The certificate format to use: DER or PEM. PEM is the default.
+
+=item B<-key keyfile>
+
+The private key to use. If not specified then the certificate file will
+be used.
+
+=item B<-keyform format>
+
+The private format to use: DER or PEM. PEM is the default.
+
+=item B<-pass arg>
+
+the private key password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-verify depth>
+
+The verify depth to use. This specifies the maximum length of the
+server certificate chain and turns on server certificate verification.
+Currently the verify operation continues after errors so all the problems
+with a certificate chain can be seen. As a side effect the connection
+will never fail due to a server certificate verify failure.
+
+=item B<-verify_return_error>
+
+Return verification errors instead of continuing. This will typically
+abort the handshake with a fatal error.
+
+=item B<-CApath directory>
+
+The directory to use for server certificate verification. This directory
+must be in "hash format", see B<verify> for more information. These are
+also used when building the client certificate chain.
+
+=item B<-CAfile file>
+
+A file containing trusted certificates to use during server authentication
+and to use when attempting to build the client certificate chain.
+
+=item B<-purpose, -ignore_critical, -issuer_checks, -crl_check, -crl_check_all, -policy_check, -extended_crl, -x509_strict, -policy -check_ss_sig -no_alt_chains>
+
+Set various certificate chain valiadition option. See the
+L<B<verify>|verify(1)> manual page for details.
+
+=item B<-reconnect>
+
+reconnects to the same server 5 times using the same session ID, this can
+be used as a test that session caching is working.
+
+=item B<-pause>
+
+pauses 1 second between each read and write call.
+
+=item B<-showcerts>
+
+display the whole server certificate chain: normally only the server
+certificate itself is displayed.
+
+=item B<-prexit>
+
+print session information when the program exits. This will always attempt
+to print out information even if the connection fails. Normally information
+will only be printed out once if the connection succeeds. This option is useful
+because the cipher in use may be renegotiated or the connection may fail
+because a client certificate is required or is requested only after an
+attempt is made to access a certain URL. Note: the output produced by this
+option is not always accurate because a connection might never have been
+established.
+
+=item B<-state>
+
+prints out the SSL session states.
+
+=item B<-debug>
+
+print extensive debugging information including a hex dump of all traffic.
+
+=item B<-msg>
+
+show all protocol messages with hex dump.
+
+=item B<-nbio_test>
+
+tests non-blocking I/O
+
+=item B<-nbio>
+
+turns on non-blocking I/O
+
+=item B<-crlf>
+
+this option translated a line feed from the terminal into CR+LF as required
+by some servers.
+
+=item B<-ign_eof>
+
+inhibit shutting down the connection when end of file is reached in the
+input.
+
+=item B<-quiet>
+
+inhibit printing of session and certificate information.  This implicitly
+turns on B<-ign_eof> as well.
+
+=item B<-no_ign_eof>
+
+shut down the connection when end of file is reached in the input.
+Can be used to override the implicit B<-ign_eof> after B<-quiet>.
+
+=item B<-psk_identity identity>
+
+Use the PSK identity B<identity> when using a PSK cipher suite.
+
+=item B<-psk key>
+
+Use the PSK key B<key> when using a PSK cipher suite. The key is
+given as a hexadecimal number without leading 0x, for example -psk
+1a2b3c4d.
+
+=item B<-ssl2>, B<-ssl3>, B<-tls1>, B<-tls1_1>, B<-tls1_2>, B<-no_ssl2>, B<-no_ssl3>, B<-no_tls1>, B<-no_tls1_1>, B<-no_tls1_2>
+
+These options require or disable the use of the specified SSL or TLS protocols.
+By default the initial handshake uses a I<version-flexible> method which will
+negotiate the highest mutually supported protocol version.
+
+=item B<-fallback_scsv>
+
+Send TLS_FALLBACK_SCSV in the ClientHello.
+
+=item B<-bugs>
+
+there are several known bug in SSL and TLS implementations. Adding this
+option enables various workarounds.
+
+=item B<-cipher cipherlist>
+
+this allows the cipher list sent by the client to be modified. Although
+the server determines which cipher suite is used it should take the first
+supported cipher in the list sent by the client. See the B<ciphers>
+command for more information.
+
+=item B<-serverpref>
+
+use the server's cipher preferences; only used for SSLV2.
+
+=item B<-starttls protocol>
+
+send the protocol-specific message(s) to switch to TLS for communication.
+B<protocol> is a keyword for the intended protocol.  Currently, the only
+supported keywords are "smtp", "pop3", "imap", and "ftp".
+
+=item B<-tlsextdebug>
+
+print out a hex dump of any TLS extensions received from the server.
+
+=item B<-no_ticket>
+
+disable RFC4507bis session ticket support. 
+
+=item B<-sess_out filename>
+
+output SSL session to B<filename>
+
+=item B<-sess_in sess.pem>
+
+load SSL session from B<filename>. The client will attempt to resume a
+connection from this session.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<s_client>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<-serverinfo types>
+
+a list of comma-separated TLS Extension Types (numbers between 0 and 
+65535).  Each type will be sent as an empty ClientHello TLS Extension.
+The server's response (if any) will be encoded and displayed as a PEM
+file.
+
+=item B<-status>
+
+sends a certificate status request to the server (OCSP stapling). The server
+response (if any) is printed out.
+
+=item B<-alpn protocols>, B<-nextprotoneg protocols>
+
+these flags enable the 
+Enable the Application-Layer Protocol Negotiation or Next Protocol
+Negotiation extension, respectively. ALPN is the IETF standard and
+replaces NPN.
+The B<protocols> list is a
+comma-separated protocol names that the client should advertise
+support for. The list should contain most wanted protocols first.
+Protocol names are printable ASCII strings, for example "http/1.1" or
+"spdy/3".
+Empty list of protocols is treated specially and will cause the client to
+advertise support for the TLS extension but disconnect just after
+reciving ServerHello with a list of server supported protocols.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 CONNECTED COMMANDS
+
+If a connection is established with an SSL server then any data received
+from the server is displayed and any key presses will be sent to the
+server. When used interactively (which means neither B<-quiet> nor B<-ign_eof>
+have been given), the session will be renegotiated if the line begins with an
+B<R>, and if the line begins with a B<Q> or if end of file is reached, the
+connection will be closed down.
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+B<s_client> can be used to debug SSL servers. To connect to an SSL HTTP
+server the command:
+
+ openssl s_client -connect servername:443
+
+would typically be used (https uses port 443). If the connection succeeds
+then an HTTP command can be given such as "GET /" to retrieve a web page.
+
+If the handshake fails then there are several possible causes, if it is
+nothing obvious like no client certificate then the B<-bugs>, B<-ssl2>,
+B<-ssl3>, B<-tls1>, B<-no_ssl2>, B<-no_ssl3>, B<-no_tls1> options can be tried
+in case it is a buggy server. In particular you should play with these
+options B<before> submitting a bug report to an OpenSSL mailing list.
+
+A frequent problem when attempting to get client certificates working
+is that a web client complains it has no certificates or gives an empty
+list to choose from. This is normally because the server is not sending
+the clients certificate authority in its "acceptable CA list" when it
+requests a certificate. By using B<s_client> the CA list can be viewed
+and checked. However some servers only request client authentication
+after a specific URL is requested. To obtain the list in this case it
+is necessary to use the B<-prexit> option and send an HTTP request
+for an appropriate page.
+
+If a certificate is specified on the command line using the B<-cert>
+option it will not be used unless the server specifically requests
+a client certificate. Therefor merely including a client certificate
+on the command line is no guarantee that the certificate works.
+
+If there are problems verifying a server certificate then the
+B<-showcerts> option can be used to show the whole chain.
+
+Since the SSLv23 client hello cannot include compression methods or extensions
+these will only be supported if its use is disabled, for example by using the
+B<-no_sslv2> option.
+
+The B<s_client> utility is a test tool and is designed to continue the
+handshake after any certificate verification errors. As a result it will
+accept any certificate chain (trusted or not) sent by the peer. None test
+applications should B<not> do this as it makes them vulnerable to a MITM
+attack. This behaviour can be changed by with the B<-verify_return_error>
+option: any verify errors are then returned aborting the handshake.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Because this program has a lot of options and also because some of
+the techniques used are rather old, the C source of s_client is rather
+hard to read and not a model of how things should be done. A typical
+SSL client program would be much simpler.
+
+The B<-prexit> option is a bit of a hack. We should really report
+information whenever a session is renegotiated.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<sess_id(1)|sess_id(1)>, L<s_server(1)|s_server(1)>, L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The -no_alt_chains options was first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2b.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/s_server.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/s_server.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa17488
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/s_server.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,423 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+s_server - SSL/TLS server program
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<s_server>
+[B<-accept port>]
+[B<-context id>]
+[B<-verify depth>]
+[B<-Verify depth>]
+[B<-crl_check>]
+[B<-crl_check_all>]
+[B<-cert filename>]
+[B<-certform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-key keyfile>]
+[B<-keyform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-pass arg>]
+[B<-dcert filename>]
+[B<-dcertform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-dkey keyfile>]
+[B<-dkeyform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-dpass arg>]
+[B<-dhparam filename>]
+[B<-nbio>]
+[B<-nbio_test>]
+[B<-crlf>]
+[B<-debug>]
+[B<-msg>]
+[B<-state>]
+[B<-CApath directory>]
+[B<-CAfile filename>]
+[B<-no_alt_chains>]
+[B<-nocert>]
+[B<-cipher cipherlist>]
+[B<-serverpref>]
+[B<-quiet>]
+[B<-no_tmp_rsa>]
+[B<-ssl2>]
+[B<-ssl3>]
+[B<-tls1>]
+[B<-no_ssl2>]
+[B<-no_ssl3>]
+[B<-no_tls1>]
+[B<-no_dhe>]
+[B<-bugs>]
+[B<-hack>]
+[B<-www>]
+[B<-WWW>]
+[B<-HTTP>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+[B<-tlsextdebug>]
+[B<-no_ticket>]
+[B<-id_prefix arg>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<-serverinfo file>]
+[B<-no_resumption_on_reneg>]
+[B<-status>]
+[B<-status_verbose>]
+[B<-status_timeout nsec>]
+[B<-status_url url>]
+[B<-alpn protocols>]
+[B<-nextprotoneg protocols>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<s_server> command implements a generic SSL/TLS server which listens
+for connections on a given port using SSL/TLS.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-accept port>
+
+the TCP port to listen on for connections. If not specified 4433 is used.
+
+=item B<-context id>
+
+sets the SSL context id. It can be given any string value. If this option
+is not present a default value will be used.
+
+=item B<-cert certname>
+
+The certificate to use, most servers cipher suites require the use of a
+certificate and some require a certificate with a certain public key type:
+for example the DSS cipher suites require a certificate containing a DSS
+(DSA) key. If not specified then the filename "server.pem" will be used.
+
+=item B<-certform format>
+
+The certificate format to use: DER or PEM. PEM is the default.
+
+=item B<-key keyfile>
+
+The private key to use. If not specified then the certificate file will
+be used.
+
+=item B<-keyform format>
+
+The private format to use: DER or PEM. PEM is the default.
+
+=item B<-pass arg>
+
+the private key password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-dcert filename>, B<-dkey keyname>
+
+specify an additional certificate and private key, these behave in the
+same manner as the B<-cert> and B<-key> options except there is no default
+if they are not specified (no additional certificate and key is used). As
+noted above some cipher suites require a certificate containing a key of
+a certain type. Some cipher suites need a certificate carrying an RSA key
+and some a DSS (DSA) key. By using RSA and DSS certificates and keys
+a server can support clients which only support RSA or DSS cipher suites
+by using an appropriate certificate.
+
+=item B<-dcertform format>, B<-dkeyform format>, B<-dpass arg>
+
+additional certificate and private key format and passphrase respectively.
+
+=item B<-nocert>
+
+if this option is set then no certificate is used. This restricts the
+cipher suites available to the anonymous ones (currently just anonymous
+DH).
+
+=item B<-dhparam filename>
+
+the DH parameter file to use. The ephemeral DH cipher suites generate keys
+using a set of DH parameters. If not specified then an attempt is made to
+load the parameters from the server certificate file. If this fails then
+a static set of parameters hard coded into the s_server program will be used.
+
+=item B<-no_dhe>
+
+if this option is set then no DH parameters will be loaded effectively
+disabling the ephemeral DH cipher suites.
+
+=item B<-no_tmp_rsa>
+
+certain export cipher suites sometimes use a temporary RSA key, this option
+disables temporary RSA key generation.
+
+=item B<-verify depth>, B<-Verify depth>
+
+The verify depth to use. This specifies the maximum length of the
+client certificate chain and makes the server request a certificate from
+the client. With the B<-verify> option a certificate is requested but the
+client does not have to send one, with the B<-Verify> option the client
+must supply a certificate or an error occurs.
+
+If the ciphersuite cannot request a client certificate (for example an
+anonymous ciphersuite or PSK) this option has no effect.
+
+=item B<-crl_check>, B<-crl_check_all>
+
+Check the peer certificate has not been revoked by its CA.
+The CRL(s) are appended to the certificate file. With the B<-crl_check_all>
+option all CRLs of all CAs in the chain are checked.
+
+=item B<-CApath directory>
+
+The directory to use for client certificate verification. This directory
+must be in "hash format", see B<verify> for more information. These are
+also used when building the server certificate chain.
+
+=item B<-CAfile file>
+
+A file containing trusted certificates to use during client authentication
+and to use when attempting to build the server certificate chain. The list
+is also used in the list of acceptable client CAs passed to the client when
+a certificate is requested.
+
+=item B<-no_alt_chains>
+
+See the L<B<verify>|verify(1)> manual page for details.
+
+=item B<-state>
+
+prints out the SSL session states.
+
+=item B<-debug>
+
+print extensive debugging information including a hex dump of all traffic.
+
+=item B<-msg>
+
+show all protocol messages with hex dump.
+
+=item B<-nbio_test>
+
+tests non blocking I/O
+
+=item B<-nbio>
+
+turns on non blocking I/O
+
+=item B<-crlf>
+
+this option translated a line feed from the terminal into CR+LF.
+
+=item B<-quiet>
+
+inhibit printing of session and certificate information.
+
+=item B<-psk_hint hint>
+
+Use the PSK identity hint B<hint> when using a PSK cipher suite.
+
+=item B<-psk key>
+
+Use the PSK key B<key> when using a PSK cipher suite. The key is
+given as a hexadecimal number without leading 0x, for example -psk
+1a2b3c4d.
+
+=item B<-ssl2>, B<-ssl3>, B<-tls1>, B<-tls1_1>, B<-tls1_2>, B<-no_ssl2>, B<-no_ssl3>, B<-no_tls1>, B<-no_tls1_1>, B<-no_tls1_2>
+
+These options require or disable the use of the specified SSL or TLS protocols.
+By default the initial handshake uses a I<version-flexible> method which will
+negotiate the highest mutually supported protocol version.
+
+=item B<-bugs>
+
+there are several known bug in SSL and TLS implementations. Adding this
+option enables various workarounds.
+
+=item B<-hack>
+
+this option enables a further workaround for some some early Netscape
+SSL code (?).
+
+=item B<-cipher cipherlist>
+
+this allows the cipher list used by the server to be modified.  When
+the client sends a list of supported ciphers the first client cipher
+also included in the server list is used. Because the client specifies
+the preference order, the order of the server cipherlist irrelevant. See
+the B<ciphers> command for more information.
+
+=item B<-serverpref>
+
+use the server's cipher preferences, rather than the client's preferences.
+
+=item B<-tlsextdebug>
+
+print out a hex dump of any TLS extensions received from the server.
+
+=item B<-no_ticket>
+
+disable RFC4507bis session ticket support. 
+
+=item B<-www>
+
+sends a status message back to the client when it connects. This includes
+lots of information about the ciphers used and various session parameters.
+The output is in HTML format so this option will normally be used with a
+web browser.
+
+=item B<-WWW>
+
+emulates a simple web server. Pages will be resolved relative to the
+current directory, for example if the URL https://myhost/page.html is
+requested the file ./page.html will be loaded.
+
+=item B<-HTTP>
+
+emulates a simple web server. Pages will be resolved relative to the
+current directory, for example if the URL https://myhost/page.html is
+requested the file ./page.html will be loaded. The files loaded are
+assumed to contain a complete and correct HTTP response (lines that
+are part of the HTTP response line and headers must end with CRLF).
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<s_server>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=item B<-id_prefix arg>
+
+generate SSL/TLS session IDs prefixed by B<arg>. This is mostly useful
+for testing any SSL/TLS code (eg. proxies) that wish to deal with multiple
+servers, when each of which might be generating a unique range of session
+IDs (eg. with a certain prefix).
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<-serverinfo file>
+
+a file containing one or more blocks of PEM data.  Each PEM block
+must encode a TLS ServerHello extension (2 bytes type, 2 bytes length,
+followed by "length" bytes of extension data).  If the client sends
+an empty TLS ClientHello extension matching the type, the corresponding
+ServerHello extension will be returned.
+
+=item B<-no_resumption_on_reneg>
+
+set SSL_OP_NO_SESSION_RESUMPTION_ON_RENEGOTIATION flag.
+
+=item B<-status>
+
+enables certificate status request support (aka OCSP stapling).
+
+=item B<-status_verbose>
+
+enables certificate status request support (aka OCSP stapling) and gives
+a verbose printout of the OCSP response.
+
+=item B<-status_timeout nsec>
+
+sets the timeout for OCSP response to B<nsec> seconds.
+
+=item B<-status_url url>
+
+sets a fallback responder URL to use if no responder URL is present in the
+server certificate. Without this option an error is returned if the server
+certificate does not contain a responder address.
+
+=item B<-alpn protocols>, B<-nextprotoneg protocols>
+
+these flags enable the 
+Enable the Application-Layer Protocol Negotiation or Next Protocol
+Negotiation extension, respectively. ALPN is the IETF standard and
+replaces NPN.
+The B<protocols> list is a
+comma-separated list of supported protocol names.
+The list should contain most wanted protocols first.
+Protocol names are printable ASCII strings, for example "http/1.1" or
+"spdy/3".
+
+=back
+
+=head1 CONNECTED COMMANDS
+
+If a connection request is established with an SSL client and neither the
+B<-www> nor the B<-WWW> option has been used then normally any data received
+from the client is displayed and any key presses will be sent to the client. 
+
+Certain single letter commands are also recognized which perform special
+operations: these are listed below.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<q>
+
+end the current SSL connection but still accept new connections.
+
+=item B<Q>
+
+end the current SSL connection and exit.
+
+=item B<r>
+
+renegotiate the SSL session.
+
+=item B<R>
+
+renegotiate the SSL session and request a client certificate.
+
+=item B<P>
+
+send some plain text down the underlying TCP connection: this should
+cause the client to disconnect due to a protocol violation.
+
+=item B<S>
+
+print out some session cache status information.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+B<s_server> can be used to debug SSL clients. To accept connections from
+a web browser the command:
+
+ openssl s_server -accept 443 -www
+
+can be used for example.
+
+Most web browsers (in particular Netscape and MSIE) only support RSA cipher
+suites, so they cannot connect to servers which don't use a certificate
+carrying an RSA key or a version of OpenSSL with RSA disabled.
+
+Although specifying an empty list of CAs when requesting a client certificate
+is strictly speaking a protocol violation, some SSL clients interpret this to
+mean any CA is acceptable. This is useful for debugging purposes.
+
+The session parameters can printed out using the B<sess_id> program.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Because this program has a lot of options and also because some of
+the techniques used are rather old, the C source of s_server is rather
+hard to read and not a model of how things should be done. A typical
+SSL server program would be much simpler.
+
+The output of common ciphers is wrong: it just gives the list of ciphers that
+OpenSSL recognizes and the client supports.
+
+There should be a way for the B<s_server> program to print out details of any
+unknown cipher suites a client says it supports.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<sess_id(1)|sess_id(1)>, L<s_client(1)|s_client(1)>, L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The -no_alt_chains options was first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2b.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/s_time.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/s_time.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9082d87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/s_time.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+s_time - SSL/TLS performance timing program
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<s_time>
+[B<-connect host:port>]
+[B<-www page>]
+[B<-cert filename>]
+[B<-key filename>]
+[B<-CApath directory>]
+[B<-CAfile filename>]
+[B<-reuse>]
+[B<-new>]
+[B<-verify depth>]
+[B<-nbio>]
+[B<-time seconds>]
+[B<-ssl2>]
+[B<-ssl3>]
+[B<-bugs>]
+[B<-cipher cipherlist>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<s_time> command implements a generic SSL/TLS client which connects to a
+remote host using SSL/TLS. It can request a page from the server and includes
+the time to transfer the payload data in its timing measurements. It measures
+the number of connections within a given timeframe, the amount of data
+transferred (if any), and calculates the average time spent for one connection.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-connect host:port>
+
+This specifies the host and optional port to connect to.
+
+=item B<-www page>
+
+This specifies the page to GET from the server. A value of '/' gets the
+index.htm[l] page. If this parameter is not specified, then B<s_time> will only
+perform the handshake to establish SSL connections but not transfer any
+payload data.
+
+=item B<-cert certname>
+
+The certificate to use, if one is requested by the server. The default is
+not to use a certificate. The file is in PEM format.
+
+=item B<-key keyfile>
+
+The private key to use. If not specified then the certificate file will
+be used. The file is in PEM format.
+
+=item B<-verify depth>
+
+The verify depth to use. This specifies the maximum length of the
+server certificate chain and turns on server certificate verification.
+Currently the verify operation continues after errors so all the problems
+with a certificate chain can be seen. As a side effect the connection
+will never fail due to a server certificate verify failure.
+
+=item B<-CApath directory>
+
+The directory to use for server certificate verification. This directory
+must be in "hash format", see B<verify> for more information. These are
+also used when building the client certificate chain.
+
+=item B<-CAfile file>
+
+A file containing trusted certificates to use during server authentication
+and to use when attempting to build the client certificate chain.
+
+=item B<-new>
+
+performs the timing test using a new session ID for each connection.
+If neither B<-new> nor B<-reuse> are specified, they are both on by default
+and executed in sequence.
+
+=item B<-reuse>
+
+performs the timing test using the same session ID; this can be used as a test
+that session caching is working. If neither B<-new> nor B<-reuse> are
+specified, they are both on by default and executed in sequence.
+
+=item B<-nbio>
+
+turns on non-blocking I/O.
+
+=item B<-ssl2>, B<-ssl3>
+
+these options disable the use of certain SSL or TLS protocols. By default
+the initial handshake uses a method which should be compatible with all
+servers and permit them to use SSL v3, SSL v2 or TLS as appropriate.
+The timing program is not as rich in options to turn protocols on and off as
+the L<s_client(1)|s_client(1)> program and may not connect to all servers.
+
+Unfortunately there are a lot of ancient and broken servers in use which
+cannot handle this technique and will fail to connect. Some servers only
+work if TLS is turned off with the B<-ssl3> option; others
+will only support SSL v2 and may need the B<-ssl2> option.
+
+=item B<-bugs>
+
+there are several known bug in SSL and TLS implementations. Adding this
+option enables various workarounds.
+
+=item B<-cipher cipherlist>
+
+this allows the cipher list sent by the client to be modified. Although
+the server determines which cipher suite is used it should take the first
+supported cipher in the list sent by the client.
+See the L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)> command for more information.
+
+=item B<-time length>
+
+specifies how long (in seconds) B<s_time> should establish connections and
+optionally transfer payload data from a server. Server and client performance
+and the link speed determine how many connections B<s_time> can establish.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+B<s_time> can be used to measure the performance of an SSL connection.
+To connect to an SSL HTTP server and get the default page the command
+
+ openssl s_time -connect servername:443 -www / -CApath yourdir -CAfile yourfile.pem -cipher commoncipher [-ssl3]
+
+would typically be used (https uses port 443). 'commoncipher' is a cipher to
+which both client and server can agree, see the L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)> command
+for details.
+
+If the handshake fails then there are several possible causes, if it is
+nothing obvious like no client certificate then the B<-bugs>, B<-ssl2>,
+B<-ssl3> options can be tried
+in case it is a buggy server. In particular you should play with these
+options B<before> submitting a bug report to an OpenSSL mailing list.
+
+A frequent problem when attempting to get client certificates working
+is that a web client complains it has no certificates or gives an empty
+list to choose from. This is normally because the server is not sending
+the clients certificate authority in its "acceptable CA list" when it
+requests a certificate. By using L<s_client(1)|s_client(1)> the CA list can be
+viewed and checked. However some servers only request client authentication
+after a specific URL is requested. To obtain the list in this case it
+is necessary to use the B<-prexit> option of L<s_client(1)|s_client(1)> and
+send an HTTP request for an appropriate page.
+
+If a certificate is specified on the command line using the B<-cert>
+option it will not be used unless the server specifically requests
+a client certificate. Therefor merely including a client certificate
+on the command line is no guarantee that the certificate works.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Because this program does not have all the options of the
+L<s_client(1)|s_client(1)> program to turn protocols on and off, you may not be
+able to measure the performance of all protocols with all servers.
+
+The B<-verify> option should really exit if the server verification
+fails.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<s_client(1)|s_client(1)>, L<s_server(1)|s_server(1)>, L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/sess_id.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/sess_id.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9988d2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/sess_id.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+sess_id - SSL/TLS session handling utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<sess_id>
+[B<-inform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-outform PEM|DER>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-context ID>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<sess_id> process the encoded version of the SSL session structure
+and optionally prints out SSL session details (for example the SSL session
+master key) in human readable format. Since this is a diagnostic tool that
+needs some knowledge of the SSL protocol to use properly, most users will
+not need to use it.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the input format. The B<DER> option uses an ASN1 DER encoded
+format containing session details. The precise format can vary from one version
+to the next.  The B<PEM> form is the default format: it consists of the B<DER>
+format base64 encoded with additional header and footer lines.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read session information from or standard
+input by default.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename to write session information to or standard
+output if this option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+prints out the various public or private key components in
+plain text in addition to the encoded version. 
+
+=item B<-cert>
+
+if a certificate is present in the session it will be output using this option,
+if the B<-text> option is also present then it will be printed out in text form.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+this option prevents output of the encoded version of the session.
+
+=item B<-context ID>
+
+this option can set the session id so the output session information uses the
+supplied ID. The ID can be any string of characters. This option wont normally
+be used.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 OUTPUT
+
+Typical output:
+
+ SSL-Session:
+     Protocol  : TLSv1
+     Cipher    : 0016
+     Session-ID: 871E62626C554CE95488823752CBD5F3673A3EF3DCE9C67BD916C809914B40ED
+     Session-ID-ctx: 01000000
+     Master-Key: A7CEFC571974BE02CAC305269DC59F76EA9F0B180CB6642697A68251F2D2BB57E51DBBB4C7885573192AE9AEE220FACD
+     Key-Arg   : None
+     Start Time: 948459261
+     Timeout   : 300 (sec)
+     Verify return code 0 (ok)
+
+Theses are described below in more detail.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<Protocol>
+
+this is the protocol in use TLSv1, SSLv3 or SSLv2.
+
+=item B<Cipher>
+
+the cipher used this is the actual raw SSL or TLS cipher code, see the SSL
+or TLS specifications for more information.
+
+=item B<Session-ID>
+
+the SSL session ID in hex format.
+
+=item B<Session-ID-ctx>
+
+the session ID context in hex format.
+
+=item B<Master-Key>
+
+this is the SSL session master key.
+
+=item B<Key-Arg>
+
+the key argument, this is only used in SSL v2.
+
+=item B<Start Time>
+
+this is the session start time represented as an integer in standard Unix format.
+
+=item B<Timeout>
+
+the timeout in seconds.
+
+=item B<Verify return code>
+
+this is the return code when an SSL client certificate is verified.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The PEM encoded session format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN SSL SESSION PARAMETERS-----
+ -----END SSL SESSION PARAMETERS-----
+
+Since the SSL session output contains the master key it is possible to read the contents
+of an encrypted session using this information. Therefore appropriate security precautions
+should be taken if the information is being output by a "real" application. This is
+however strongly discouraged and should only be used for debugging purposes.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The cipher and start time should be printed out in human readable form.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)>, L<s_server(1)|s_server(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/smime.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/smime.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04a83ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/smime.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,450 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+smime - S/MIME utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<smime>
+[B<-encrypt>]
+[B<-decrypt>]
+[B<-sign>]
+[B<-resign>]
+[B<-verify>]
+[B<-pk7out>]
+[B<-[cipher]>]
+[B<-in file>]
+[B<-no_alt_chains>]
+[B<-certfile file>]
+[B<-signer file>]
+[B<-recip  file>]
+[B<-inform SMIME|PEM|DER>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-inkey file>]
+[B<-out file>]
+[B<-outform SMIME|PEM|DER>]
+[B<-content file>]
+[B<-to addr>]
+[B<-from ad>]
+[B<-subject s>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-indef>]
+[B<-noindef>]
+[B<-stream>]
+[B<-rand file(s)>]
+[B<-md digest>]
+[cert.pem]...
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<smime> command handles S/MIME mail. It can encrypt, decrypt, sign and
+verify S/MIME messages.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+There are six operation options that set the type of operation to be performed.
+The meaning of the other options varies according to the operation type.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-encrypt>
+
+encrypt mail for the given recipient certificates. Input file is the message
+to be encrypted. The output file is the encrypted mail in MIME format.
+
+Note that no revocation check is done for the recipient cert, so if that
+key has been compromised, others may be able to decrypt the text.
+
+=item B<-decrypt>
+
+decrypt mail using the supplied certificate and private key. Expects an
+encrypted mail message in MIME format for the input file. The decrypted mail
+is written to the output file.
+
+=item B<-sign>
+
+sign mail using the supplied certificate and private key. Input file is
+the message to be signed. The signed message in MIME format is written
+to the output file.
+
+=item B<-verify>
+
+verify signed mail. Expects a signed mail message on input and outputs
+the signed data. Both clear text and opaque signing is supported.
+
+=item B<-pk7out>
+
+takes an input message and writes out a PEM encoded PKCS#7 structure.
+
+=item B<-resign>
+
+resign a message: take an existing message and one or more new signers.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+the input message to be encrypted or signed or the MIME message to
+be decrypted or verified.
+
+=item B<-inform SMIME|PEM|DER>
+
+this specifies the input format for the PKCS#7 structure. The default
+is B<SMIME> which reads an S/MIME format message. B<PEM> and B<DER>
+format change this to expect PEM and DER format PKCS#7 structures
+instead. This currently only affects the input format of the PKCS#7
+structure, if no PKCS#7 structure is being input (for example with
+B<-encrypt> or B<-sign>) this option has no effect.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+the message text that has been decrypted or verified or the output MIME
+format message that has been signed or verified.
+
+=item B<-outform SMIME|PEM|DER>
+
+this specifies the output format for the PKCS#7 structure. The default
+is B<SMIME> which write an S/MIME format message. B<PEM> and B<DER>
+format change this to write PEM and DER format PKCS#7 structures
+instead. This currently only affects the output format of the PKCS#7
+structure, if no PKCS#7 structure is being output (for example with
+B<-verify> or B<-decrypt>) this option has no effect.
+
+=item B<-stream -indef -noindef>
+
+the B<-stream> and B<-indef> options are equivalent and enable streaming I/O
+for encoding operations. This permits single pass processing of data without
+the need to hold the entire contents in memory, potentially supporting very
+large files. Streaming is automatically set for S/MIME signing with detached
+data if the output format is B<SMIME> it is currently off by default for all
+other operations.
+
+=item B<-noindef>
+
+disable streaming I/O where it would produce and indefinite length constructed
+encoding. This option currently has no effect. In future streaming will be
+enabled by default on all relevant operations and this option will disable it.
+
+=item B<-content filename>
+
+This specifies a file containing the detached content, this is only
+useful with the B<-verify> command. This is only usable if the PKCS#7
+structure is using the detached signature form where the content is
+not included. This option will override any content if the input format
+is S/MIME and it uses the multipart/signed MIME content type.
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+this option adds plain text (text/plain) MIME headers to the supplied
+message if encrypting or signing. If decrypting or verifying it strips
+off text headers: if the decrypted or verified message is not of MIME 
+type text/plain then an error occurs.
+
+=item B<-CAfile file>
+
+a file containing trusted CA certificates, only used with B<-verify>.
+
+=item B<-CApath dir>
+
+a directory containing trusted CA certificates, only used with
+B<-verify>. This directory must be a standard certificate directory: that
+is a hash of each subject name (using B<x509 -hash>) should be linked
+to each certificate.
+
+=item B<-md digest>
+
+digest algorithm to use when signing or resigning. If not present then the
+default digest algorithm for the signing key will be used (usually SHA1).
+
+=item B<-[cipher]>
+
+the encryption algorithm to use. For example DES  (56 bits) - B<-des>,
+triple DES (168 bits) - B<-des3>,
+EVP_get_cipherbyname() function) can also be used preceded by a dash, for 
+example B<-aes_128_cbc>. See L<B<enc>|enc(1)> for list of ciphers
+supported by your version of OpenSSL.
+
+If not specified triple DES is used. Only used with B<-encrypt>.
+
+=item B<-nointern>
+
+when verifying a message normally certificates (if any) included in
+the message are searched for the signing certificate. With this option
+only the certificates specified in the B<-certfile> option are used.
+The supplied certificates can still be used as untrusted CAs however.
+
+=item B<-noverify>
+
+do not verify the signers certificate of a signed message.
+
+=item B<-nochain>
+
+do not do chain verification of signers certificates: that is don't
+use the certificates in the signed message as untrusted CAs.
+
+=item B<-nosigs>
+
+don't try to verify the signatures on the message.
+
+=item B<-nocerts>
+
+when signing a message the signer's certificate is normally included
+with this option it is excluded. This will reduce the size of the
+signed message but the verifier must have a copy of the signers certificate
+available locally (passed using the B<-certfile> option for example).
+
+=item B<-noattr>
+
+normally when a message is signed a set of attributes are included which
+include the signing time and supported symmetric algorithms. With this
+option they are not included.
+
+=item B<-binary>
+
+normally the input message is converted to "canonical" format which is
+effectively using CR and LF as end of line: as required by the S/MIME
+specification. When this option is present no translation occurs. This
+is useful when handling binary data which may not be in MIME format.
+
+=item B<-nodetach>
+
+when signing a message use opaque signing: this form is more resistant
+to translation by mail relays but it cannot be read by mail agents that
+do not support S/MIME.  Without this option cleartext signing with
+the MIME type multipart/signed is used.
+
+=item B<-certfile file>
+
+allows additional certificates to be specified. When signing these will
+be included with the message. When verifying these will be searched for
+the signers certificates. The certificates should be in PEM format.
+
+=item B<-signer file>
+
+a signing certificate when signing or resigning a message, this option can be
+used multiple times if more than one signer is required. If a message is being
+verified then the signers certificates will be written to this file if the
+verification was successful.
+
+=item B<-recip file>
+
+the recipients certificate when decrypting a message. This certificate
+must match one of the recipients of the message or an error occurs.
+
+=item B<-inkey file>
+
+the private key to use when signing or decrypting. This must match the
+corresponding certificate. If this option is not specified then the
+private key must be included in the certificate file specified with
+the B<-recip> or B<-signer> file. When signing this option can be used
+multiple times to specify successive keys.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the private key password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-rand file(s)>
+
+a file or files containing random data used to seed the random number
+generator, or an EGD socket (see L<RAND_egd(3)|RAND_egd(3)>).
+Multiple files can be specified separated by a OS-dependent character.
+The separator is B<;> for MS-Windows, B<,> for OpenVMS, and B<:> for
+all others.
+
+=item B<cert.pem...>
+
+one or more certificates of message recipients: used when encrypting
+a message. 
+
+=item B<-to, -from, -subject>
+
+the relevant mail headers. These are included outside the signed
+portion of a message so they may be included manually. If signing
+then many S/MIME mail clients check the signers certificate's email
+address matches that specified in the From: address.
+
+=item B<-purpose, -ignore_critical, -issuer_checks, -crl_check, -crl_check_all, -policy_check, -extended_crl, -x509_strict, -policy -check_ss_sig -no_alt_chains>
+
+Set various options of certificate chain verification. See
+L<B<verify>|verify(1)> manual page for details.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The MIME message must be sent without any blank lines between the
+headers and the output. Some mail programs will automatically add
+a blank line. Piping the mail directly to sendmail is one way to
+achieve the correct format.
+
+The supplied message to be signed or encrypted must include the
+necessary MIME headers or many S/MIME clients wont display it
+properly (if at all). You can use the B<-text> option to automatically
+add plain text headers.
+
+A "signed and encrypted" message is one where a signed message is
+then encrypted. This can be produced by encrypting an already signed
+message: see the examples section.
+
+This version of the program only allows one signer per message but it
+will verify multiple signers on received messages. Some S/MIME clients
+choke if a message contains multiple signers. It is possible to sign
+messages "in parallel" by signing an already signed message.
+
+The options B<-encrypt> and B<-decrypt> reflect common usage in S/MIME
+clients. Strictly speaking these process PKCS#7 enveloped data: PKCS#7
+encrypted data is used for other purposes.
+
+The B<-resign> option uses an existing message digest when adding a new
+signer. This means that attributes must be present in at least one existing
+signer using the same message digest or this operation will fail.
+
+The B<-stream> and B<-indef> options enable experimental streaming I/O support.
+As a result the encoding is BER using indefinite length constructed encoding
+and no longer DER. Streaming is supported for the B<-encrypt> operation and the
+B<-sign> operation if the content is not detached.
+
+Streaming is always used for the B<-sign> operation with detached data but
+since the content is no longer part of the PKCS#7 structure the encoding
+remains DER.
+
+=head1 EXIT CODES
+
+=over 4
+
+=item Z<>0
+
+the operation was completely successfully.
+
+=item Z<>1
+
+an error occurred parsing the command options.
+
+=item Z<>2
+
+one of the input files could not be read.
+
+=item Z<>3
+
+an error occurred creating the PKCS#7 file or when reading the MIME
+message.
+
+=item Z<>4
+
+an error occurred decrypting or verifying the message.
+
+=item Z<>5
+
+the message was verified correctly but an error occurred writing out
+the signers certificates.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Create a cleartext signed message:
+
+ openssl smime -sign -in message.txt -text -out mail.msg \
+	-signer mycert.pem
+
+Create an opaque signed message:
+
+ openssl smime -sign -in message.txt -text -out mail.msg -nodetach \
+	-signer mycert.pem
+
+Create a signed message, include some additional certificates and
+read the private key from another file:
+
+ openssl smime -sign -in in.txt -text -out mail.msg \
+	-signer mycert.pem -inkey mykey.pem -certfile mycerts.pem
+
+Create a signed message with two signers:
+
+ openssl smime -sign -in message.txt -text -out mail.msg \
+	-signer mycert.pem -signer othercert.pem
+
+Send a signed message under Unix directly to sendmail, including headers:
+
+ openssl smime -sign -in in.txt -text -signer mycert.pem \
+	-from steve@openssl.org -to someone@somewhere \
+	-subject "Signed message" | sendmail someone@somewhere
+
+Verify a message and extract the signer's certificate if successful:
+
+ openssl smime -verify -in mail.msg -signer user.pem -out signedtext.txt
+
+Send encrypted mail using triple DES:
+
+ openssl smime -encrypt -in in.txt -from steve@openssl.org \
+	-to someone@somewhere -subject "Encrypted message" \
+	-des3 user.pem -out mail.msg
+
+Sign and encrypt mail:
+
+ openssl smime -sign -in ml.txt -signer my.pem -text \
+	| openssl smime -encrypt -out mail.msg \
+	-from steve@openssl.org -to someone@somewhere \
+	-subject "Signed and Encrypted message" -des3 user.pem
+
+Note: the encryption command does not include the B<-text> option because the
+message being encrypted already has MIME headers.
+
+Decrypt mail:
+
+ openssl smime -decrypt -in mail.msg -recip mycert.pem -inkey key.pem
+
+The output from Netscape form signing is a PKCS#7 structure with the
+detached signature format. You can use this program to verify the
+signature by line wrapping the base64 encoded structure and surrounding
+it with:
+
+ -----BEGIN PKCS7-----
+ -----END PKCS7-----
+
+and using the command: 
+
+ openssl smime -verify -inform PEM -in signature.pem -content content.txt
+
+Alternatively you can base64 decode the signature and use:
+
+ openssl smime -verify -inform DER -in signature.der -content content.txt
+
+Create an encrypted message using 128 bit Camellia:
+
+ openssl smime -encrypt -in plain.txt -camellia128 -out mail.msg cert.pem
+
+Add a signer to an existing message:
+
+ openssl smime -resign -in mail.msg -signer newsign.pem -out mail2.msg
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+The MIME parser isn't very clever: it seems to handle most messages that I've
+thrown at it but it may choke on others.
+
+The code currently will only write out the signer's certificate to a file: if
+the signer has a separate encryption certificate this must be manually
+extracted. There should be some heuristic that determines the correct
+encryption certificate.
+
+Ideally a database should be maintained of a certificates for each email
+address.
+
+The code doesn't currently take note of the permitted symmetric encryption
+algorithms as supplied in the SMIMECapabilities signed attribute. This means the
+user has to manually include the correct encryption algorithm. It should store
+the list of permitted ciphers in a database and only use those.
+
+No revocation checking is done on the signer's certificate.
+
+The current code can only handle S/MIME v2 messages, the more complex S/MIME v3
+structures may cause parsing errors.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The use of multiple B<-signer> options and the B<-resign> command were first
+added in OpenSSL 1.0.0
+
+The -no_alt_chains options was first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2b.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/speed.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/speed.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cd1998
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/speed.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+speed - test library performance
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl speed>
+[B<-engine id>]
+[B<md2>]
+[B<mdc2>]
+[B<md5>]
+[B<hmac>]
+[B<sha1>]
+[B<rmd160>]
+[B<idea-cbc>]
+[B<rc2-cbc>]
+[B<rc5-cbc>]
+[B<bf-cbc>]
+[B<des-cbc>]
+[B<des-ede3>]
+[B<rc4>]
+[B<rsa512>]
+[B<rsa1024>]
+[B<rsa2048>]
+[B<rsa4096>]
+[B<dsa512>]
+[B<dsa1024>]
+[B<dsa2048>]
+[B<idea>]
+[B<rc2>]
+[B<des>]
+[B<rsa>]
+[B<blowfish>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+This command is used to test the performance of cryptographic algorithms.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<speed>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=item B<[zero or more test algorithms]>
+
+If any options are given, B<speed> tests those algorithms, otherwise all of
+the above are tested.
+
+=back
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/spkac.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/spkac.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..97fb80e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/spkac.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+spkac - SPKAC printing and generating utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<spkac>
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-key keyfile>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-challenge string>]
+[B<-pubkey>]
+[B<-spkac spkacname>]
+[B<-spksect section>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-verify>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<spkac> command processes Netscape signed public key and challenge
+(SPKAC) files. It can print out their contents, verify the signature and
+produce its own SPKACs from a supplied private key.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read from or standard input if this
+option is not specified. Ignored if the B<-key> option is used.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+specifies the output filename to write to or standard output by
+default.
+
+=item B<-key keyfile>
+
+create an SPKAC file using the private key in B<keyfile>. The
+B<-in>, B<-noout>, B<-spksect> and B<-verify> options are ignored if
+present.
+
+=item B<-passin password>
+
+the input file password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-challenge string>
+
+specifies the challenge string if an SPKAC is being created.
+
+=item B<-spkac spkacname>
+
+allows an alternative name form the variable containing the
+SPKAC. The default is "SPKAC". This option affects both
+generated and input SPKAC files.
+
+=item B<-spksect section>
+
+allows an alternative name form the section containing the
+SPKAC. The default is the default section.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+don't output the text version of the SPKAC (not used if an
+SPKAC is being created).
+
+=item B<-pubkey>
+
+output the public key of an SPKAC (not used if an SPKAC is
+being created).
+
+=item B<-verify>
+
+verifies the digital signature on the supplied SPKAC.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<spkac>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Print out the contents of an SPKAC:
+
+ openssl spkac -in spkac.cnf
+
+Verify the signature of an SPKAC:
+
+ openssl spkac -in spkac.cnf -noout -verify
+
+Create an SPKAC using the challenge string "hello":
+
+ openssl spkac -key key.pem -challenge hello -out spkac.cnf
+
+Example of an SPKAC, (long lines split up for clarity):
+
+ SPKAC=MIG5MGUwXDANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAANLADBIAkEA1cCoq2Wa3Ixs47uI7F\
+ PVwHVIPDx5yso105Y6zpozam135a8R0CpoRvkkigIyXfcCjiVi5oWk+6FfPaD03u\
+ PFoQIDAQABFgVoZWxsbzANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQQFAANBAFpQtY/FojdwkJh1bEIYuc\
+ 2EeM2KHTWPEepWYeawvHD0gQ3DngSC75YCWnnDdq+NQ3F+X4deMx9AaEglZtULwV\
+ 4=
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+A created SPKAC with suitable DN components appended can be fed into
+the B<ca> utility.
+
+SPKACs are typically generated by Netscape when a form is submitted
+containing the B<KEYGEN> tag as part of the certificate enrollment
+process.
+
+The challenge string permits a primitive form of proof of possession
+of private key. By checking the SPKAC signature and a random challenge
+string some guarantee is given that the user knows the private key
+corresponding to the public key being certified. This is important in
+some applications. Without this it is possible for a previous SPKAC
+to be used in a "replay attack".
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<ca(1)|ca(1)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/ts.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/ts.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d6aa47d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/ts.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,594 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+ts - Time Stamping Authority tool (client/server)
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<ts>
+B<-query>
+[B<-rand> file:file...]
+[B<-config> configfile]
+[B<-data> file_to_hash]
+[B<-digest> digest_bytes]
+[B<-md2>|B<-md4>|B<-md5>|B<-sha>|B<-sha1>|B<-mdc2>|B<-ripemd160>|B<...>]
+[B<-policy> object_id]
+[B<-no_nonce>]
+[B<-cert>]
+[B<-in> request.tsq]
+[B<-out> request.tsq]
+[B<-text>]
+
+B<openssl> B<ts>
+B<-reply>
+[B<-config> configfile]
+[B<-section> tsa_section]
+[B<-queryfile> request.tsq]
+[B<-passin> password_src]
+[B<-signer> tsa_cert.pem]
+[B<-inkey> private.pem]
+[B<-chain> certs_file.pem]
+[B<-policy> object_id]
+[B<-in> response.tsr]
+[B<-token_in>]
+[B<-out> response.tsr]
+[B<-token_out>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-engine> id]
+
+B<openssl> B<ts>
+B<-verify>
+[B<-data> file_to_hash]
+[B<-digest> digest_bytes]
+[B<-queryfile> request.tsq]
+[B<-in> response.tsr]
+[B<-token_in>]
+[B<-CApath> trusted_cert_path]
+[B<-CAfile> trusted_certs.pem]
+[B<-untrusted> cert_file.pem]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<ts> command is a basic Time Stamping Authority (TSA) client and server
+application as specified in RFC 3161 (Time-Stamp Protocol, TSP). A
+TSA can be part of a PKI deployment and its role is to provide long
+term proof of the existence of a certain datum before a particular
+time. Here is a brief description of the protocol:
+
+=over 4
+
+=item 1.
+
+The TSA client computes a one-way hash value for a data file and sends
+the hash to the TSA.
+
+=item 2.
+
+The TSA attaches the current date and time to the received hash value,
+signs them and sends the time stamp token back to the client. By
+creating this token the TSA certifies the existence of the original
+data file at the time of response generation.
+
+=item 3.
+
+The TSA client receives the time stamp token and verifies the
+signature on it. It also checks if the token contains the same hash
+value that it had sent to the TSA.
+
+=back
+
+There is one DER encoded protocol data unit defined for transporting a time
+stamp request to the TSA and one for sending the time stamp response
+back to the client. The B<ts> command has three main functions:
+creating a time stamp request based on a data file,
+creating a time stamp response based on a request, verifying if a
+response corresponds to a particular request or a data file.
+
+There is no support for sending the requests/responses automatically
+over HTTP or TCP yet as suggested in RFC 3161. The users must send the
+requests either by ftp or e-mail.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=head2 Time Stamp Request generation
+
+The B<-query> switch can be used for creating and printing a time stamp
+request with the following options:
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-rand> file:file...
+
+The files containing random data for seeding the random number
+generator. Multiple files can be specified, the separator is B<;> for
+MS-Windows, B<,> for VMS and B<:> for all other platforms. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-config> configfile
+
+The configuration file to use, this option overrides the
+B<OPENSSL_CONF> environment variable. Only the OID section
+of the config file is used with the B<-query> command. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-data> file_to_hash
+
+The data file for which the time stamp request needs to be
+created. stdin is the default if neither the B<-data> nor the B<-digest>
+parameter is specified. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-digest> digest_bytes
+
+It is possible to specify the message imprint explicitly without the data
+file. The imprint must be specified in a hexadecimal format, two characters
+per byte, the bytes optionally separated by colons (e.g. 1A:F6:01:... or
+1AF601...). The number of bytes must match the message digest algorithm 
+in use. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-md2>|B<-md4>|B<-md5>|B<-sha>|B<-sha1>|B<-mdc2>|B<-ripemd160>|B<...>
+
+The message digest to apply to the data file, it supports all the message
+digest algorithms that are supported by the openssl B<dgst> command.
+The default is SHA-1. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-policy> object_id
+
+The policy that the client expects the TSA to use for creating the
+time stamp token. Either the dotted OID notation or OID names defined
+in the config file can be used. If no policy is requested the TSA will
+use its own default policy. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-no_nonce>
+
+No nonce is specified in the request if this option is
+given. Otherwise a 64 bit long pseudo-random none is
+included in the request. It is recommended to use nonce to
+protect against replay-attacks. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-cert>
+
+The TSA is expected to include its signing certificate in the
+response. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-in> request.tsq
+
+This option specifies a previously created time stamp request in DER
+format that will be printed into the output file. Useful when you need
+to examine the content of a request in human-readable
+
+format. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-out> request.tsq
+
+Name of the output file to which the request will be written. Default
+is stdout. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+If this option is specified the output is human-readable text format
+instead of DER. (Optional)
+
+=back
+
+=head2 Time Stamp Response generation
+
+A time stamp response (TimeStampResp) consists of a response status
+and the time stamp token itself (ContentInfo), if the token generation was
+successful. The B<-reply> command is for creating a time stamp
+response or time stamp token based on a request and printing the
+response/token in human-readable format. If B<-token_out> is not
+specified the output is always a time stamp response (TimeStampResp),
+otherwise it is a time stamp token (ContentInfo).
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-config> configfile
+
+The configuration file to use, this option overrides the
+B<OPENSSL_CONF> environment variable. See B<CONFIGURATION FILE
+OPTIONS> for configurable variables. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-section> tsa_section
+
+The name of the config file section conatining the settings for the
+response generation. If not specified the default TSA section is
+used, see B<CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS> for details. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-queryfile> request.tsq
+
+The name of the file containing a DER encoded time stamp request. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-passin> password_src
+
+Specifies the password source for the private key of the TSA. See
+B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-signer> tsa_cert.pem
+
+The signer certificate of the TSA in PEM format. The TSA signing
+certificate must have exactly one extended key usage assigned to it:
+timeStamping. The extended key usage must also be critical, otherwise
+the certificate is going to be refused. Overrides the B<signer_cert>
+variable of the config file. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-inkey> private.pem
+
+The signer private key of the TSA in PEM format. Overrides the
+B<signer_key> config file option. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-chain> certs_file.pem
+
+The collection of certificates in PEM format that will all
+be included in the response in addition to the signer certificate if
+the B<-cert> option was used for the request. This file is supposed to
+contain the certificate chain for the signer certificate from its
+issuer upwards. The B<-reply> command does not build a certificate
+chain automatically. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-policy> object_id
+
+The default policy to use for the response unless the client
+explicitly requires a particular TSA policy. The OID can be specified
+either in dotted notation or with its name. Overrides the
+B<default_policy> config file option. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-in> response.tsr
+
+Specifies a previously created time stamp response or time stamp token
+(if B<-token_in> is also specified) in DER format that will be written
+to the output file. This option does not require a request, it is
+useful e.g. when you need to examine the content of a response or
+token or you want to extract the time stamp token from a response. If
+the input is a token and the output is a time stamp response a default
+'granted' status info is added to the token. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-token_in>
+
+This flag can be used together with the B<-in> option and indicates
+that the input is a DER encoded time stamp token (ContentInfo) instead
+of a time stamp response (TimeStampResp). (Optional)
+
+=item B<-out> response.tsr
+
+The response is written to this file. The format and content of the
+file depends on other options (see B<-text>, B<-token_out>). The default is
+stdout. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-token_out>
+
+The output is a time stamp token (ContentInfo) instead of time stamp
+response (TimeStampResp). (Optional)
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+If this option is specified the output is human-readable text format
+instead of DER. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-engine> id
+
+Specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<ts>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms. Default is builtin. (Optional)
+
+=back
+
+=head2 Time Stamp Response verification
+
+The B<-verify> command is for verifying if a time stamp response or time
+stamp token is valid and matches a particular time stamp request or
+data file. The B<-verify> command does not use the configuration file.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-data> file_to_hash
+
+The response or token must be verified against file_to_hash. The file
+is hashed with the message digest algorithm specified in the token. 
+The B<-digest> and B<-queryfile> options must not be specified with this one.
+(Optional)
+
+=item B<-digest> digest_bytes
+
+The response or token must be verified against the message digest specified
+with this option. The number of bytes must match the message digest algorithm
+specified in the token. The B<-data> and B<-queryfile> options must not be
+specified with this one. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-queryfile> request.tsq
+
+The original time stamp request in DER format. The B<-data> and B<-digest>
+options must not be specified with this one. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-in> response.tsr
+
+The time stamp response that needs to be verified in DER format. (Mandatory)
+
+=item B<-token_in>
+
+This flag can be used together with the B<-in> option and indicates
+that the input is a DER encoded time stamp token (ContentInfo) instead
+of a time stamp response (TimeStampResp). (Optional)
+
+=item B<-CApath> trusted_cert_path
+
+The name of the directory containing the trused CA certificates of the
+client. See the similar option of L<verify(1)|verify(1)> for additional
+details. Either this option or B<-CAfile> must be specified. (Optional)
+
+
+=item B<-CAfile> trusted_certs.pem
+
+The name of the file containing a set of trusted self-signed CA 
+certificates in PEM format. See the similar option of 
+L<verify(1)|verify(1)> for additional details. Either this option 
+or B<-CApath> must be specified.
+(Optional)
+
+=item B<-untrusted> cert_file.pem
+
+Set of additional untrusted certificates in PEM format which may be
+needed when building the certificate chain for the TSA's signing
+certificate. This file must contain the TSA signing certificate and
+all intermediate CA certificates unless the response includes them.
+(Optional)
+
+=back
+
+=head1 CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
+
+The B<-query> and B<-reply> commands make use of a configuration file
+defined by the B<OPENSSL_CONF> environment variable. See L<config(5)|config(5)>
+for a general description of the syntax of the config file. The
+B<-query> command uses only the symbolic OID names section
+and it can work without it. However, the B<-reply> command needs the
+config file for its operation.
+
+When there is a command line switch equivalent of a variable the
+switch always overrides the settings in the config file.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<tsa> section, B<default_tsa>	
+
+This is the main section and it specifies the name of another section
+that contains all the options for the B<-reply> command. This default
+section can be overridden with the B<-section> command line switch. (Optional)
+
+=item B<oid_file>
+
+See L<ca(1)|ca(1)> for description. (Optional)
+
+=item B<oid_section>
+
+See L<ca(1)|ca(1)> for description. (Optional)
+
+=item B<RANDFILE>
+
+See L<ca(1)|ca(1)> for description. (Optional)
+
+=item B<serial>
+
+The name of the file containing the hexadecimal serial number of the
+last time stamp response created. This number is incremented by 1 for
+each response. If the file does not exist at the time of response
+generation a new file is created with serial number 1. (Mandatory)
+
+=item B<crypto_device>
+
+Specifies the OpenSSL engine that will be set as the default for 
+all available algorithms. The default value is builtin, you can specify 
+any other engines supported by OpenSSL (e.g. use chil for the NCipher HSM).
+(Optional)
+
+=item B<signer_cert>
+
+TSA signing certificate in PEM format. The same as the B<-signer>
+command line option. (Optional)
+
+=item B<certs>
+
+A file containing a set of PEM encoded certificates that need to be
+included in the response. The same as the B<-chain> command line
+option. (Optional)
+
+=item B<signer_key>
+
+The private key of the TSA in PEM format. The same as the B<-inkey>
+command line option. (Optional)
+
+=item B<default_policy>
+
+The default policy to use when the request does not mandate any
+policy. The same as the B<-policy> command line option. (Optional)
+
+=item B<other_policies>
+
+Comma separated list of policies that are also acceptable by the TSA
+and used only if the request explicitly specifies one of them. (Optional)
+
+=item B<digests>
+
+The list of message digest algorithms that the TSA accepts. At least
+one algorithm must be specified. (Mandatory)
+
+=item B<accuracy>
+
+The accuracy of the time source of the TSA in seconds, milliseconds
+and microseconds. E.g. secs:1, millisecs:500, microsecs:100. If any of
+the components is missing zero is assumed for that field. (Optional)
+
+=item B<clock_precision_digits>
+
+Specifies the maximum number of digits, which represent the fraction of 
+seconds, that  need to be included in the time field. The trailing zeroes
+must be removed from the time, so there might actually be fewer digits,
+or no fraction of seconds at all. Supported only on UNIX platforms.
+The maximum value is 6, default is 0.
+(Optional)
+
+=item B<ordering>
+
+If this option is yes the responses generated by this TSA can always
+be ordered, even if the time difference between two responses is less
+than the sum of their accuracies. Default is no. (Optional)
+
+=item B<tsa_name>
+
+Set this option to yes if the subject name of the TSA must be included in
+the TSA name field of the response. Default is no. (Optional)
+
+=item B<ess_cert_id_chain>
+
+The SignedData objects created by the TSA always contain the
+certificate identifier of the signing certificate in a signed
+attribute (see RFC 2634, Enhanced Security Services). If this option
+is set to yes and either the B<certs> variable or the B<-chain> option
+is specified then the certificate identifiers of the chain will also
+be included in the SigningCertificate signed attribute. If this
+variable is set to no, only the signing certificate identifier is
+included. Default is no. (Optional)
+
+=back
+
+=head1 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+
+B<OPENSSL_CONF> contains the path of the configuration file and can be
+overridden by the B<-config> command line option.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+All the examples below presume that B<OPENSSL_CONF> is set to a proper
+configuration file, e.g. the example configuration file 
+openssl/apps/openssl.cnf will do.
+
+=head2 Time Stamp Request
+
+To create a time stamp request for design1.txt with SHA-1 
+without nonce and policy and no certificate is required in the response:
+
+  openssl ts -query -data design1.txt -no_nonce \
+	-out design1.tsq
+
+To create a similar time stamp request with specifying the message imprint
+explicitly:
+
+  openssl ts -query -digest b7e5d3f93198b38379852f2c04e78d73abdd0f4b \
+	 -no_nonce -out design1.tsq
+
+To print the content of the previous request in human readable format:
+
+  openssl ts -query -in design1.tsq -text
+
+To create a time stamp request which includes the MD-5 digest 
+of design2.txt, requests the signer certificate and nonce,
+specifies a policy id (assuming the tsa_policy1 name is defined in the
+OID section of the config file):
+
+  openssl ts -query -data design2.txt -md5 \
+	-policy tsa_policy1 -cert -out design2.tsq
+
+=head2 Time Stamp Response
+
+Before generating a response a signing certificate must be created for
+the TSA that contains the B<timeStamping> critical extended key usage extension
+without any other key usage extensions. You can add the
+'extendedKeyUsage = critical,timeStamping' line to the user certificate section
+of the config file to generate a proper certificate. See L<req(1)|req(1)>,
+L<ca(1)|ca(1)>, L<x509(1)|x509(1)> for instructions. The examples
+below assume that cacert.pem contains the certificate of the CA,
+tsacert.pem is the signing certificate issued by cacert.pem and
+tsakey.pem is the private key of the TSA.
+
+To create a time stamp response for a request:
+
+  openssl ts -reply -queryfile design1.tsq -inkey tsakey.pem \
+	-signer tsacert.pem -out design1.tsr
+
+If you want to use the settings in the config file you could just write:
+
+  openssl ts -reply -queryfile design1.tsq -out design1.tsr
+
+To print a time stamp reply to stdout in human readable format:
+
+  openssl ts -reply -in design1.tsr -text
+
+To create a time stamp token instead of time stamp response:
+
+  openssl ts -reply -queryfile design1.tsq -out design1_token.der -token_out
+
+To print a time stamp token to stdout in human readable format:
+
+  openssl ts -reply -in design1_token.der -token_in -text -token_out
+
+To extract the time stamp token from a response:
+
+  openssl ts -reply -in design1.tsr -out design1_token.der -token_out
+
+To add 'granted' status info to a time stamp token thereby creating a
+valid response:
+
+  openssl ts -reply -in design1_token.der -token_in -out design1.tsr
+
+=head2 Time Stamp Verification
+
+To verify a time stamp reply against a request:
+
+  openssl ts -verify -queryfile design1.tsq -in design1.tsr \
+	-CAfile cacert.pem -untrusted tsacert.pem
+
+To verify a time stamp reply that includes the certificate chain:
+
+  openssl ts -verify -queryfile design2.tsq -in design2.tsr \
+	-CAfile cacert.pem
+
+To verify a time stamp token against the original data file:
+  openssl ts -verify -data design2.txt -in design2.tsr \
+	-CAfile cacert.pem
+
+To verify a time stamp token against a message imprint:
+  openssl ts -verify -digest b7e5d3f93198b38379852f2c04e78d73abdd0f4b \
+	 -in design2.tsr -CAfile cacert.pem
+
+You could also look at the 'test' directory for more examples.
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+If you find any bugs or you have suggestions please write to
+Zoltan Glozik <zglozik@opentsa.org>. Known issues:
+
+=over 4
+
+=item * No support for time stamps over SMTP, though it is quite easy
+to implement an automatic e-mail based TSA with L<procmail(1)|procmail(1)> 
+and L<perl(1)|perl(1)>. HTTP server support is provided in the form of 
+a separate apache module. HTTP client support is provided by
+L<tsget(1)|tsget(1)>. Pure TCP/IP protocol is not supported.
+
+=item * The file containing the last serial number of the TSA is not
+locked when being read or written. This is a problem if more than one
+instance of L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)> is trying to create a time stamp
+response at the same time. This is not an issue when using the apache
+server module, it does proper locking.
+
+=item * Look for the FIXME word in the source files.
+
+=item * The source code should really be reviewed by somebody else, too.
+
+=item * More testing is needed, I have done only some basic tests (see
+test/testtsa).
+
+=back
+
+=cut
+
+=head1 AUTHOR
+
+Zoltan Glozik <zglozik@opentsa.org>, OpenTSA project (http://www.opentsa.org)
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<tsget(1)|tsget(1)>, L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>, L<req(1)|req(1)>, 
+L<x509(1)|x509(1)>, L<ca(1)|ca(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>, 
+L<config(5)|config(5)>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/tsget.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/tsget.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56db985
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/tsget.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+tsget - Time Stamping HTTP/HTTPS client
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<tsget>
+B<-h> server_url
+[B<-e> extension]
+[B<-o> output]
+[B<-v>]
+[B<-d>]
+[B<-k> private_key.pem]
+[B<-p> key_password]
+[B<-c> client_cert.pem]
+[B<-C> CA_certs.pem]
+[B<-P> CA_path]
+[B<-r> file:file...]
+[B<-g> EGD_socket]
+[request]...
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<tsget> command can be used for sending a time stamp request, as
+specified in B<RFC 3161>, to a time stamp server over HTTP or HTTPS and storing
+the time stamp response in a file. This tool cannot be used for creating the
+requests and verifying responses, you can use the OpenSSL B<ts(1)> command to
+do that. B<tsget> can send several requests to the server without closing
+the TCP connection if more than one requests are specified on the command
+line.
+
+The tool sends the following HTTP request for each time stamp request:
+
+	POST url HTTP/1.1
+	User-Agent: OpenTSA tsget.pl/<version>
+	Host: <host>:<port>
+	Pragma: no-cache
+	Content-Type: application/timestamp-query
+	Accept: application/timestamp-reply
+	Content-Length: length of body
+
+	...binary request specified by the user...
+
+B<tsget> expects a response of type application/timestamp-reply, which is
+written to a file without any interpretation.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-h> server_url
+
+The URL of the HTTP/HTTPS server listening for time stamp requests.
+
+=item B<-e> extension
+
+If the B<-o> option is not given this argument specifies the extension of the
+output files. The base name of the output file will be the same as those of
+the input files. Default extension is '.tsr'. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-o> output
+
+This option can be specified only when just one request is sent to the
+server. The time stamp response will be written to the given output file. '-'
+means standard output. In case of multiple time stamp requests or the absence
+of this argument the names of the output files will be derived from the names
+of the input files and the default or specified extension argument. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-v>
+
+The name of the currently processed request is printed on standard
+error. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-d>
+
+Switches on verbose mode for the underlying B<curl> library. You can see
+detailed debug messages for the connection. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-k> private_key.pem
+
+(HTTPS) In case of certificate-based client authentication over HTTPS
+<private_key.pem> must contain the private key of the user. The private key
+file can optionally be protected by a passphrase. The B<-c> option must also
+be specified. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-p> key_password
+
+(HTTPS) Specifies the passphrase for the private key specified by the B<-k>
+argument. If this option is omitted and the key is passphrase protected B<tsget>
+will ask for it. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-c> client_cert.pem
+
+(HTTPS) In case of certificate-based client authentication over HTTPS
+<client_cert.pem> must contain the X.509 certificate of the user.  The B<-k>
+option must also be specified. If this option is not specified no
+certificate-based client authentication will take place. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-C> CA_certs.pem
+
+(HTTPS) The trusted CA certificate store. The certificate chain of the peer's
+certificate must include one of the CA certificates specified in this file.
+Either option B<-C> or option B<-P> must be given in case of HTTPS. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-P> CA_path
+
+(HTTPS) The path containing the trusted CA certificates to verify the peer's
+certificate. The directory must be prepared with the B<c_rehash>
+OpenSSL utility. Either option B<-C> or option B<-P> must be given in case of
+HTTPS. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-rand> file:file...
+
+The files containing random data for seeding the random number
+generator. Multiple files can be specified, the separator is B<;> for
+MS-Windows, B<,> for VMS and B<:> for all other platforms. (Optional)
+
+=item B<-g> EGD_socket
+
+The name of an EGD socket to get random data from. (Optional)
+
+=item [request]...
+
+List of files containing B<RFC 3161> DER-encoded time stamp requests. If no
+requests are specified only one request will be sent to the server and it will be
+read from the standard input. (Optional)
+
+=back
+
+=head1 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+
+The B<TSGET> environment variable can optionally contain default
+arguments. The content of this variable is added to the list of command line
+arguments.
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+The examples below presume that B<file1.tsq> and B<file2.tsq> contain valid
+time stamp requests, tsa.opentsa.org listens at port 8080 for HTTP requests
+and at port 8443 for HTTPS requests, the TSA service is available at the /tsa
+absolute path.
+
+Get a time stamp response for file1.tsq over HTTP, output is written to 
+file1.tsr:
+
+  tsget -h http://tsa.opentsa.org:8080/tsa file1.tsq
+
+Get a time stamp response for file1.tsq and file2.tsq over HTTP showing
+progress, output is written to file1.reply and file2.reply respectively:
+
+  tsget -h http://tsa.opentsa.org:8080/tsa -v -e .reply \
+	file1.tsq file2.tsq
+
+Create a time stamp request, write it to file3.tsq, send it to the server and
+write the response to file3.tsr:
+
+  openssl ts -query -data file3.txt -cert | tee file3.tsq \
+	| tsget -h http://tsa.opentsa.org:8080/tsa \
+	-o file3.tsr
+
+Get a time stamp response for file1.tsq over HTTPS without client
+authentication:
+
+  tsget -h https://tsa.opentsa.org:8443/tsa \
+	-C cacerts.pem file1.tsq
+
+Get a time stamp response for file1.tsq over HTTPS with certificate-based
+client authentication (it will ask for the passphrase if client_key.pem is
+protected):
+
+  tsget -h https://tsa.opentsa.org:8443/tsa -C cacerts.pem \
+	-k client_key.pem -c client_cert.pem file1.tsq
+
+You can shorten the previous command line if you make use of the B<TSGET>
+environment variable. The following commands do the same as the previous
+example:
+
+  TSGET='-h https://tsa.opentsa.org:8443/tsa -C cacerts.pem \
+	-k client_key.pem -c client_cert.pem'
+  export TSGET
+  tsget file1.tsq
+
+=head1 AUTHOR
+
+Zoltan Glozik <zglozik@opentsa.org>, OpenTSA project (http://www.opentsa.org)
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>, L<ts(1)|ts(1)>, L<curl(1)|curl(1)>, 
+B<RFC 3161>
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/verify.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/verify.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b376732
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/verify.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,457 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+verify - Utility to verify certificates.
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<verify>
+[B<-CApath directory>]
+[B<-CAfile file>]
+[B<-purpose purpose>]
+[B<-policy arg>]
+[B<-ignore_critical>]
+[B<-attime timestamp>]
+[B<-check_ss_sig>]
+[B<-crlfile file>]
+[B<-crl_download>]
+[B<-crl_check>]
+[B<-crl_check_all>]
+[B<-policy_check>]
+[B<-explicit_policy>]
+[B<-inhibit_any>]
+[B<-inhibit_map>]
+[B<-x509_strict>]
+[B<-extended_crl>]
+[B<-use_deltas>]
+[B<-policy_print>]
+[B<-no_alt_chains>]
+[B<-allow_proxy_certs>]
+[B<-untrusted file>]
+[B<-help>]
+[B<-issuer_checks>]
+[B<-trusted file>]
+[B<-verbose>]
+[B<->]
+[certificates]
+
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<verify> command verifies certificate chains.
+
+=head1 COMMAND OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-CApath directory>
+
+A directory of trusted certificates. The certificates should have names
+of the form: hash.0 or have symbolic links to them of this
+form ("hash" is the hashed certificate subject name: see the B<-hash> option
+of the B<x509> utility). Under Unix the B<c_rehash> script will automatically
+create symbolic links to a directory of certificates.
+
+=item B<-CAfile file>
+A file of trusted certificates. The file should contain multiple certificates
+in PEM format concatenated together.
+
+=item B<-attime timestamp>
+
+Perform validation checks using time specified by B<timestamp> and not
+current system time. B<timestamp> is the number of seconds since
+01.01.1970 (UNIX time).
+
+=item B<-check_ss_sig>
+
+Verify the signature on the self-signed root CA. This is disabled by default
+because it doesn't add any security.
+
+=item B<-crlfile file>
+
+File containing one or more CRL's (in PEM format) to load.
+
+=item B<-crl_download>
+
+Attempt to download CRL information for this certificate.
+
+=item B<-crl_check>
+
+Checks end entity certificate validity by attempting to look up a valid CRL.
+If a valid CRL cannot be found an error occurs.
+
+=item B<-untrusted file>
+
+A file of untrusted certificates. The file should contain multiple certificates
+in PEM format concatenated together.
+
+=item B<-purpose purpose>
+
+The intended use for the certificate. If this option is not specified,
+B<verify> will not consider certificate purpose during chain verification.
+Currently accepted uses are B<sslclient>, B<sslserver>, B<nssslserver>,
+B<smimesign>, B<smimeencrypt>. See the B<VERIFY OPERATION> section for more
+information.
+
+=item B<-help>
+
+Print out a usage message.
+
+=item B<-verbose>
+
+Print extra information about the operations being performed.
+
+=item B<-issuer_checks>
+
+Print out diagnostics relating to searches for the issuer certificate of the
+current certificate. This shows why each candidate issuer certificate was
+rejected. The presence of rejection messages does not itself imply that
+anything is wrong; during the normal verification process, several
+rejections may take place.
+
+=item B<-policy arg>
+
+Enable policy processing and add B<arg> to the user-initial-policy-set (see
+RFC5280). The policy B<arg> can be an object name an OID in numeric form.
+This argument can appear more than once.
+
+=item B<-policy_check>
+
+Enables certificate policy processing.
+
+=item B<-explicit_policy>
+
+Set policy variable require-explicit-policy (see RFC5280).
+
+=item B<-inhibit_any>
+
+Set policy variable inhibit-any-policy (see RFC5280).
+
+=item B<-inhibit_map>
+
+Set policy variable inhibit-policy-mapping (see RFC5280).
+
+=item B<-no_alt_chains>
+
+When building a certificate chain, if the first certificate chain found is not
+trusted, then OpenSSL will continue to check to see if an alternative chain can
+be found that is trusted. With this option that behaviour is suppressed so that
+only the first chain found is ever used. Using this option will force the
+behaviour to match that of previous OpenSSL versions.
+
+=item B<-allow_proxy_certs>
+
+Allow the verification of proxy certificates.
+
+=item B<-trusted file>
+
+A file of additional trusted certificates. The file should contain multiple
+certificates in PEM format concatenated together.
+
+=item B<-policy_print>
+
+Print out diagnostics related to policy processing.
+
+=item B<-crl_check>
+
+Checks end entity certificate validity by attempting to look up a valid CRL.
+If a valid CRL cannot be found an error occurs. 
+
+=item B<-crl_check_all>
+
+Checks the validity of B<all> certificates in the chain by attempting
+to look up valid CRLs.
+
+=item B<-ignore_critical>
+
+Normally if an unhandled critical extension is present which is not
+supported by OpenSSL the certificate is rejected (as required by RFC5280).
+If this option is set critical extensions are ignored.
+
+=item B<-x509_strict>
+
+For strict X.509 compliance, disable non-compliant workarounds for broken
+certificates.
+
+=item B<-extended_crl>
+
+Enable extended CRL features such as indirect CRLs and alternate CRL
+signing keys.
+
+=item B<-use_deltas>
+
+Enable support for delta CRLs.
+
+=item B<-check_ss_sig>
+
+Verify the signature on the self-signed root CA. This is disabled by default
+because it doesn't add any security.
+
+=item B<->
+
+Indicates the last option. All arguments following this are assumed to be
+certificate files. This is useful if the first certificate filename begins
+with a B<->.
+
+=item B<certificates>
+
+One or more certificates to verify. If no certificates are given, B<verify>
+will attempt to read a certificate from standard input. Certificates must be
+in PEM format.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 VERIFY OPERATION
+
+The B<verify> program uses the same functions as the internal SSL and S/MIME
+verification, therefore this description applies to these verify operations
+too.
+
+There is one crucial difference between the verify operations performed
+by the B<verify> program: wherever possible an attempt is made to continue
+after an error whereas normally the verify operation would halt on the
+first error. This allows all the problems with a certificate chain to be
+determined.
+
+The verify operation consists of a number of separate steps.
+
+Firstly a certificate chain is built up starting from the supplied certificate
+and ending in the root CA. It is an error if the whole chain cannot be built
+up. The chain is built up by looking up the issuers certificate of the current
+certificate. If a certificate is found which is its own issuer it is assumed 
+to be the root CA.
+
+The process of 'looking up the issuers certificate' itself involves a number
+of steps. In versions of OpenSSL before 0.9.5a the first certificate whose
+subject name matched the issuer of the current certificate was assumed to be
+the issuers certificate. In OpenSSL 0.9.6 and later all certificates
+whose subject name matches the issuer name of the current certificate are 
+subject to further tests. The relevant authority key identifier components
+of the current certificate (if present) must match the subject key identifier
+(if present) and issuer and serial number of the candidate issuer, in addition
+the keyUsage extension of the candidate issuer (if present) must permit
+certificate signing.
+
+The lookup first looks in the list of untrusted certificates and if no match
+is found the remaining lookups are from the trusted certificates. The root CA
+is always looked up in the trusted certificate list: if the certificate to
+verify is a root certificate then an exact match must be found in the trusted
+list.
+
+The second operation is to check every untrusted certificate's extensions for
+consistency with the supplied purpose. If the B<-purpose> option is not included
+then no checks are done. The supplied or "leaf" certificate must have extensions
+compatible with the supplied purpose and all other certificates must also be valid
+CA certificates. The precise extensions required are described in more detail in
+the B<CERTIFICATE EXTENSIONS> section of the B<x509> utility.
+
+The third operation is to check the trust settings on the root CA. The root
+CA should be trusted for the supplied purpose. For compatibility with previous
+versions of SSLeay and OpenSSL a certificate with no trust settings is considered
+to be valid for all purposes. 
+
+The final operation is to check the validity of the certificate chain. The validity
+period is checked against the current system time and the notBefore and notAfter
+dates in the certificate. The certificate signatures are also checked at this
+point.
+
+If all operations complete successfully then certificate is considered valid. If
+any operation fails then the certificate is not valid.
+
+=head1 DIAGNOSTICS
+
+When a verify operation fails the output messages can be somewhat cryptic. The
+general form of the error message is:
+
+ server.pem: /C=AU/ST=Queensland/O=CryptSoft Pty Ltd/CN=Test CA (1024 bit)
+ error 24 at 1 depth lookup:invalid CA certificate
+
+The first line contains the name of the certificate being verified followed by
+the subject name of the certificate. The second line contains the error number
+and the depth. The depth is number of the certificate being verified when a
+problem was detected starting with zero for the certificate being verified itself
+then 1 for the CA that signed the certificate and so on. Finally a text version
+of the error number is presented.
+
+An exhaustive list of the error codes and messages is shown below, this also
+includes the name of the error code as defined in the header file x509_vfy.h
+Some of the error codes are defined but never returned: these are described
+as "unused".
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<0 X509_V_OK: ok>
+
+the operation was successful.
+
+=item B<2 X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_GET_ISSUER_CERT: unable to get issuer certificate>
+
+the issuer certificate of a looked up certificate could not be found. This
+normally means the list of trusted certificates is not complete.
+
+=item B<3 X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_GET_CRL: unable to get certificate CRL>
+
+the CRL of a certificate could not be found.
+
+=item B<4 X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_DECRYPT_CERT_SIGNATURE: unable to decrypt certificate's signature>
+
+the certificate signature could not be decrypted. This means that the actual signature value
+could not be determined rather than it not matching the expected value, this is only
+meaningful for RSA keys.
+
+=item B<5 X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_DECRYPT_CRL_SIGNATURE: unable to decrypt CRL's signature>
+
+the CRL signature could not be decrypted: this means that the actual signature value
+could not be determined rather than it not matching the expected value. Unused.
+
+=item B<6 X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_DECODE_ISSUER_PUBLIC_KEY: unable to decode issuer public key>
+
+the public key in the certificate SubjectPublicKeyInfo could not be read.
+
+=item B<7 X509_V_ERR_CERT_SIGNATURE_FAILURE: certificate signature failure>
+
+the signature of the certificate is invalid.
+
+=item B<8 X509_V_ERR_CRL_SIGNATURE_FAILURE: CRL signature failure>
+
+the signature of the certificate is invalid.
+
+=item B<9 X509_V_ERR_CERT_NOT_YET_VALID: certificate is not yet valid>
+
+the certificate is not yet valid: the notBefore date is after the current time.
+
+=item B<10 X509_V_ERR_CERT_HAS_EXPIRED: certificate has expired>
+
+the certificate has expired: that is the notAfter date is before the current time.
+
+=item B<11 X509_V_ERR_CRL_NOT_YET_VALID: CRL is not yet valid>
+
+the CRL is not yet valid.
+
+=item B<12 X509_V_ERR_CRL_HAS_EXPIRED: CRL has expired>
+
+the CRL has expired.
+
+=item B<13 X509_V_ERR_ERROR_IN_CERT_NOT_BEFORE_FIELD: format error in certificate's notBefore field>
+
+the certificate notBefore field contains an invalid time.
+
+=item B<14 X509_V_ERR_ERROR_IN_CERT_NOT_AFTER_FIELD: format error in certificate's notAfter field>
+
+the certificate notAfter field contains an invalid time.
+
+=item B<15 X509_V_ERR_ERROR_IN_CRL_LAST_UPDATE_FIELD: format error in CRL's lastUpdate field>
+
+the CRL lastUpdate field contains an invalid time.
+
+=item B<16 X509_V_ERR_ERROR_IN_CRL_NEXT_UPDATE_FIELD: format error in CRL's nextUpdate field>
+
+the CRL nextUpdate field contains an invalid time.
+
+=item B<17 X509_V_ERR_OUT_OF_MEM: out of memory>
+
+an error occurred trying to allocate memory. This should never happen.
+
+=item B<18 X509_V_ERR_DEPTH_ZERO_SELF_SIGNED_CERT: self signed certificate>
+
+the passed certificate is self signed and the same certificate cannot be found in the list of
+trusted certificates.
+
+=item B<19 X509_V_ERR_SELF_SIGNED_CERT_IN_CHAIN: self signed certificate in certificate chain>
+
+the certificate chain could be built up using the untrusted certificates but the root could not
+be found locally.
+
+=item B<20 X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_GET_ISSUER_CERT_LOCALLY: unable to get local issuer certificate>
+
+the issuer certificate could not be found: this occurs if the issuer
+certificate of an untrusted certificate cannot be found.
+
+=item B<21 X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_VERIFY_LEAF_SIGNATURE: unable to verify the first certificate>
+
+no signatures could be verified because the chain contains only one certificate and it is not
+self signed.
+
+=item B<22 X509_V_ERR_CERT_CHAIN_TOO_LONG: certificate chain too long>
+
+the certificate chain length is greater than the supplied maximum depth. Unused.
+
+=item B<23 X509_V_ERR_CERT_REVOKED: certificate revoked>
+
+the certificate has been revoked.
+
+=item B<24 X509_V_ERR_INVALID_CA: invalid CA certificate>
+
+a CA certificate is invalid. Either it is not a CA or its extensions are not consistent
+with the supplied purpose.
+
+=item B<25 X509_V_ERR_PATH_LENGTH_EXCEEDED: path length constraint exceeded>
+
+the basicConstraints pathlength parameter has been exceeded.
+
+=item B<26 X509_V_ERR_INVALID_PURPOSE: unsupported certificate purpose>
+
+the supplied certificate cannot be used for the specified purpose.
+
+=item B<27 X509_V_ERR_CERT_UNTRUSTED: certificate not trusted>
+
+the root CA is not marked as trusted for the specified purpose.
+
+=item B<28 X509_V_ERR_CERT_REJECTED: certificate rejected>
+
+the root CA is marked to reject the specified purpose.
+
+=item B<29 X509_V_ERR_SUBJECT_ISSUER_MISMATCH: subject issuer mismatch>
+
+the current candidate issuer certificate was rejected because its subject name
+did not match the issuer name of the current certificate. Only displayed when
+the B<-issuer_checks> option is set.
+
+=item B<30 X509_V_ERR_AKID_SKID_MISMATCH: authority and subject key identifier mismatch>
+
+the current candidate issuer certificate was rejected because its subject key
+identifier was present and did not match the authority key identifier current
+certificate. Only displayed when the B<-issuer_checks> option is set.
+
+=item B<31 X509_V_ERR_AKID_ISSUER_SERIAL_MISMATCH: authority and issuer serial number mismatch>
+
+the current candidate issuer certificate was rejected because its issuer name
+and serial number was present and did not match the authority key identifier
+of the current certificate. Only displayed when the B<-issuer_checks> option is set.
+
+=item B<32 X509_V_ERR_KEYUSAGE_NO_CERTSIGN:key usage does not include certificate signing>
+
+the current candidate issuer certificate was rejected because its keyUsage extension
+does not permit certificate signing.
+
+=item B<50 X509_V_ERR_APPLICATION_VERIFICATION: application verification failure>
+
+an application specific error. Unused.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Although the issuer checks are a considerable improvement over the old technique they still
+suffer from limitations in the underlying X509_LOOKUP API. One consequence of this is that
+trusted certificates with matching subject name must either appear in a file (as specified by the
+B<-CAfile> option) or a directory (as specified by B<-CApath>. If they occur in both then only
+the certificates in the file will be recognised.
+
+Previous versions of OpenSSL assume certificates with matching subject name are identical and
+mishandled them.
+
+Previous versions of this documentation swapped the meaning of the
+B<X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_GET_ISSUER_CERT> and
+B<20 X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_GET_ISSUER_CERT_LOCALLY> error codes.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<x509(1)|x509(1)>
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The -no_alt_chains options was first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2b.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/version.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/version.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..58f543b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/version.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+version - print OpenSSL version information
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl version>
+[B<-a>]
+[B<-v>]
+[B<-b>]
+[B<-o>]
+[B<-f>]
+[B<-p>]
+[B<-d>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+This command is used to print out version information about OpenSSL.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-a>
+
+all information, this is the same as setting all the other flags.
+
+=item B<-v>
+
+the current OpenSSL version.
+
+=item B<-b>
+
+the date the current version of OpenSSL was built.
+
+=item B<-o>
+
+option information: various options set when the library was built.
+
+=item B<-f>
+
+compilation flags.
+
+=item B<-p>
+
+platform setting.
+
+=item B<-d>
+
+OPENSSLDIR setting.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The output of B<openssl version -a> would typically be used when sending
+in a bug report.
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The B<-d> option was added in OpenSSL 0.9.7.
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/x509.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/x509.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1479a74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/x509.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,890 @@
+
+=pod
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+x509 - Certificate display and signing utility
+
+=head1 SYNOPSIS
+
+B<openssl> B<x509>
+[B<-inform DER|PEM|NET>]
+[B<-outform DER|PEM|NET>]
+[B<-keyform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-CAform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-CAkeyform DER|PEM>]
+[B<-in filename>]
+[B<-out filename>]
+[B<-serial>]
+[B<-hash>]
+[B<-subject_hash>]
+[B<-issuer_hash>]
+[B<-ocspid>]
+[B<-subject>]
+[B<-issuer>]
+[B<-nameopt option>]
+[B<-email>]
+[B<-ocsp_uri>]
+[B<-startdate>]
+[B<-enddate>]
+[B<-purpose>]
+[B<-dates>]
+[B<-checkend num>]
+[B<-modulus>]
+[B<-pubkey>]
+[B<-fingerprint>]
+[B<-alias>]
+[B<-noout>]
+[B<-trustout>]
+[B<-clrtrust>]
+[B<-clrreject>]
+[B<-addtrust arg>]
+[B<-addreject arg>]
+[B<-setalias arg>]
+[B<-days arg>]
+[B<-set_serial n>]
+[B<-signkey filename>]
+[B<-passin arg>]
+[B<-x509toreq>]
+[B<-req>]
+[B<-CA filename>]
+[B<-CAkey filename>]
+[B<-CAcreateserial>]
+[B<-CAserial filename>]
+[B<-force_pubkey key>]
+[B<-text>]
+[B<-certopt option>]
+[B<-C>]
+[B<-md2|-md5|-sha1|-mdc2>]
+[B<-clrext>]
+[B<-extfile filename>]
+[B<-extensions section>]
+[B<-engine id>]
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+The B<x509> command is a multi purpose certificate utility. It can be
+used to display certificate information, convert certificates to
+various forms, sign certificate requests like a "mini CA" or edit
+certificate trust settings.
+
+Since there are a large number of options they will split up into
+various sections.
+
+=head1 OPTIONS
+
+=head2 INPUT, OUTPUT AND GENERAL PURPOSE OPTIONS
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-inform DER|PEM|NET>
+
+This specifies the input format normally the command will expect an X509
+certificate but this can change if other options such as B<-req> are
+present. The DER format is the DER encoding of the certificate and PEM
+is the base64 encoding of the DER encoding with header and footer lines
+added. The NET option is an obscure Netscape server format that is now
+obsolete.
+
+=item B<-outform DER|PEM|NET>
+
+This specifies the output format, the options have the same meaning as the 
+B<-inform> option.
+
+=item B<-in filename>
+
+This specifies the input filename to read a certificate from or standard input
+if this option is not specified.
+
+=item B<-out filename>
+
+This specifies the output filename to write to or standard output by
+default.
+
+=item B<-md2|-md5|-sha1|-mdc2>
+
+the digest to use. This affects any signing or display option that uses a message
+digest, such as the B<-fingerprint>, B<-signkey> and B<-CA> options. If not
+specified then SHA1 is used. If the key being used to sign with is a DSA key
+then this option has no effect: SHA1 is always used with DSA keys.
+
+=item B<-engine id>
+
+specifying an engine (by its unique B<id> string) will cause B<x509>
+to attempt to obtain a functional reference to the specified engine,
+thus initialising it if needed. The engine will then be set as the default
+for all available algorithms.
+
+=back
+
+=head2 DISPLAY OPTIONS
+
+Note: the B<-alias> and B<-purpose> options are also display options
+but are described in the B<TRUST SETTINGS> section.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-text>
+
+prints out the certificate in text form. Full details are output including the
+public key, signature algorithms, issuer and subject names, serial number
+any extensions present and any trust settings.
+
+=item B<-certopt option>
+
+customise the output format used with B<-text>. The B<option> argument can be
+a single option or multiple options separated by commas. The B<-certopt> switch
+may be also be used more than once to set multiple options. See the B<TEXT OPTIONS>
+section for more information.
+
+=item B<-noout>
+
+this option prevents output of the encoded version of the request.
+
+=item B<-pubkey>
+
+outputs the the certificate's SubjectPublicKeyInfo block in PEM format.
+
+=item B<-modulus>
+
+this option prints out the value of the modulus of the public key
+contained in the certificate.
+
+=item B<-serial>
+
+outputs the certificate serial number.
+
+=item B<-subject_hash>
+
+outputs the "hash" of the certificate subject name. This is used in OpenSSL to
+form an index to allow certificates in a directory to be looked up by subject
+name.
+
+=item B<-issuer_hash>
+
+outputs the "hash" of the certificate issuer name.
+
+=item B<-ocspid>
+
+outputs the OCSP hash values for the subject name and public key.
+
+=item B<-hash>
+
+synonym for "-subject_hash" for backward compatibility reasons.
+
+=item B<-subject_hash_old>
+
+outputs the "hash" of the certificate subject name using the older algorithm
+as used by OpenSSL versions before 1.0.0.
+
+=item B<-issuer_hash_old>
+
+outputs the "hash" of the certificate issuer name using the older algorithm
+as used by OpenSSL versions before 1.0.0.
+
+=item B<-subject>
+
+outputs the subject name.
+
+=item B<-issuer>
+
+outputs the issuer name.
+
+=item B<-nameopt option>
+
+option which determines how the subject or issuer names are displayed. The
+B<option> argument can be a single option or multiple options separated by
+commas.  Alternatively the B<-nameopt> switch may be used more than once to
+set multiple options. See the B<NAME OPTIONS> section for more information.
+
+=item B<-email>
+
+outputs the email address(es) if any.
+
+=item B<-ocsp_uri>
+
+outputs the OCSP responder address(es) if any.
+
+=item B<-startdate>
+
+prints out the start date of the certificate, that is the notBefore date.
+
+=item B<-enddate>
+
+prints out the expiry date of the certificate, that is the notAfter date.
+
+=item B<-dates>
+
+prints out the start and expiry dates of a certificate.
+
+=item B<-checkend arg>
+
+checks if the certificate expires within the next B<arg> seconds and exits
+non-zero if yes it will expire or zero if not.
+
+=item B<-fingerprint>
+
+prints out the digest of the DER encoded version of the whole certificate
+(see digest options).
+
+=item B<-C>
+
+this outputs the certificate in the form of a C source file.
+
+=back
+
+=head2 TRUST SETTINGS
+
+Please note these options are currently experimental and may well change.
+
+A B<trusted certificate> is an ordinary certificate which has several
+additional pieces of information attached to it such as the permitted
+and prohibited uses of the certificate and an "alias".
+
+Normally when a certificate is being verified at least one certificate
+must be "trusted". By default a trusted certificate must be stored
+locally and must be a root CA: any certificate chain ending in this CA
+is then usable for any purpose.
+
+Trust settings currently are only used with a root CA. They allow a finer
+control over the purposes the root CA can be used for. For example a CA
+may be trusted for SSL client but not SSL server use.
+
+See the description of the B<verify> utility for more information on the
+meaning of trust settings.
+
+Future versions of OpenSSL will recognize trust settings on any
+certificate: not just root CAs.
+
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-trustout>
+
+this causes B<x509> to output a B<trusted> certificate. An ordinary
+or trusted certificate can be input but by default an ordinary
+certificate is output and any trust settings are discarded. With the
+B<-trustout> option a trusted certificate is output. A trusted
+certificate is automatically output if any trust settings are modified.
+
+=item B<-setalias arg>
+
+sets the alias of the certificate. This will allow the certificate
+to be referred to using a nickname for example "Steve's Certificate".
+
+=item B<-alias>
+
+outputs the certificate alias, if any.
+
+=item B<-clrtrust>
+
+clears all the permitted or trusted uses of the certificate.
+
+=item B<-clrreject>
+
+clears all the prohibited or rejected uses of the certificate.
+
+=item B<-addtrust arg>
+
+adds a trusted certificate use. Any object name can be used here
+but currently only B<clientAuth> (SSL client use), B<serverAuth>
+(SSL server use) and B<emailProtection> (S/MIME email) are used.
+Other OpenSSL applications may define additional uses.
+
+=item B<-addreject arg>
+
+adds a prohibited use. It accepts the same values as the B<-addtrust>
+option.
+
+=item B<-purpose>
+
+this option performs tests on the certificate extensions and outputs
+the results. For a more complete description see the B<CERTIFICATE
+EXTENSIONS> section.
+
+=back
+
+=head2 SIGNING OPTIONS
+
+The B<x509> utility can be used to sign certificates and requests: it
+can thus behave like a "mini CA".
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<-signkey filename>
+
+this option causes the input file to be self signed using the supplied
+private key. 
+
+If the input file is a certificate it sets the issuer name to the
+subject name (i.e.  makes it self signed) changes the public key to the
+supplied value and changes the start and end dates. The start date is
+set to the current time and the end date is set to a value determined
+by the B<-days> option. Any certificate extensions are retained unless
+the B<-clrext> option is supplied.
+
+If the input is a certificate request then a self signed certificate
+is created using the supplied private key using the subject name in
+the request.
+
+=item B<-passin arg>
+
+the key password source. For more information about the format of B<arg>
+see the B<PASS PHRASE ARGUMENTS> section in L<openssl(1)|openssl(1)>.
+
+=item B<-clrext>
+
+delete any extensions from a certificate. This option is used when a
+certificate is being created from another certificate (for example with
+the B<-signkey> or the B<-CA> options). Normally all extensions are
+retained.
+
+=item B<-keyform PEM|DER>
+
+specifies the format (DER or PEM) of the private key file used in the
+B<-signkey> option.
+
+=item B<-days arg>
+
+specifies the number of days to make a certificate valid for. The default
+is 30 days.
+
+=item B<-x509toreq>
+
+converts a certificate into a certificate request. The B<-signkey> option
+is used to pass the required private key.
+
+=item B<-req>
+
+by default a certificate is expected on input. With this option a
+certificate request is expected instead.
+
+=item B<-set_serial n>
+
+specifies the serial number to use. This option can be used with either
+the B<-signkey> or B<-CA> options. If used in conjunction with the B<-CA>
+option the serial number file (as specified by the B<-CAserial> or
+B<-CAcreateserial> options) is not used.
+
+The serial number can be decimal or hex (if preceded by B<0x>). Negative
+serial numbers can also be specified but their use is not recommended.
+
+=item B<-CA filename>
+
+specifies the CA certificate to be used for signing. When this option is
+present B<x509> behaves like a "mini CA". The input file is signed by this
+CA using this option: that is its issuer name is set to the subject name
+of the CA and it is digitally signed using the CAs private key.
+
+This option is normally combined with the B<-req> option. Without the
+B<-req> option the input is a certificate which must be self signed.
+
+=item B<-CAkey filename>
+
+sets the CA private key to sign a certificate with. If this option is
+not specified then it is assumed that the CA private key is present in
+the CA certificate file.
+
+=item B<-CAserial filename>
+
+sets the CA serial number file to use.
+
+When the B<-CA> option is used to sign a certificate it uses a serial
+number specified in a file. This file consist of one line containing
+an even number of hex digits with the serial number to use. After each
+use the serial number is incremented and written out to the file again.
+
+The default filename consists of the CA certificate file base name with
+".srl" appended. For example if the CA certificate file is called 
+"mycacert.pem" it expects to find a serial number file called "mycacert.srl".
+
+=item B<-CAcreateserial>
+
+with this option the CA serial number file is created if it does not exist:
+it will contain the serial number "02" and the certificate being signed will
+have the 1 as its serial number. Normally if the B<-CA> option is specified
+and the serial number file does not exist it is an error.
+
+=item B<-extfile filename>
+
+file containing certificate extensions to use. If not specified then
+no extensions are added to the certificate.
+
+=item B<-extensions section>
+
+the section to add certificate extensions from. If this option is not
+specified then the extensions should either be contained in the unnamed
+(default) section or the default section should contain a variable called
+"extensions" which contains the section to use. See the
+L<x509v3_config(5)|x509v3_config(5)> manual page for details of the
+extension section format.
+
+=item B<-force_pubkey key>
+
+when a certificate is created set its public key to B<key> instead of the
+key in the certificate or certificate request. This option is useful for
+creating certificates where the algorithm can't normally sign requests, for
+example DH.
+
+The format or B<key> can be specified using the B<-keyform> option.
+
+=back
+
+=head2 NAME OPTIONS
+
+The B<nameopt> command line switch determines how the subject and issuer
+names are displayed. If no B<nameopt> switch is present the default "oneline"
+format is used which is compatible with previous versions of OpenSSL.
+Each option is described in detail below, all options can be preceded by
+a B<-> to turn the option off. Only the first four will normally be used.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<compat>
+
+use the old format. This is equivalent to specifying no name options at all.
+
+=item B<RFC2253>
+
+displays names compatible with RFC2253 equivalent to B<esc_2253>, B<esc_ctrl>,
+B<esc_msb>, B<utf8>, B<dump_nostr>, B<dump_unknown>, B<dump_der>,
+B<sep_comma_plus>, B<dn_rev> and B<sname>.
+
+=item B<oneline>
+
+a oneline format which is more readable than RFC2253. It is equivalent to
+specifying the  B<esc_2253>, B<esc_ctrl>, B<esc_msb>, B<utf8>, B<dump_nostr>,
+B<dump_der>, B<use_quote>, B<sep_comma_plus_space>, B<space_eq> and B<sname>
+options.
+
+=item B<multiline>
+
+a multiline format. It is equivalent B<esc_ctrl>, B<esc_msb>, B<sep_multiline>,
+B<space_eq>, B<lname> and B<align>.
+
+=item B<esc_2253>
+
+escape the "special" characters required by RFC2253 in a field That is
+B<,+"E<lt>E<gt>;>. Additionally B<#> is escaped at the beginning of a string
+and a space character at the beginning or end of a string.
+
+=item B<esc_ctrl>
+
+escape control characters. That is those with ASCII values less than
+0x20 (space) and the delete (0x7f) character. They are escaped using the
+RFC2253 \XX notation (where XX are two hex digits representing the
+character value).
+
+=item B<esc_msb>
+
+escape characters with the MSB set, that is with ASCII values larger than
+127.
+
+=item B<use_quote>
+
+escapes some characters by surrounding the whole string with B<"> characters,
+without the option all escaping is done with the B<\> character.
+
+=item B<utf8>
+
+convert all strings to UTF8 format first. This is required by RFC2253. If
+you are lucky enough to have a UTF8 compatible terminal then the use
+of this option (and B<not> setting B<esc_msb>) may result in the correct
+display of multibyte (international) characters. Is this option is not
+present then multibyte characters larger than 0xff will be represented
+using the format \UXXXX for 16 bits and \WXXXXXXXX for 32 bits.
+Also if this option is off any UTF8Strings will be converted to their
+character form first.
+
+=item B<ignore_type>
+
+this option does not attempt to interpret multibyte characters in any
+way. That is their content octets are merely dumped as though one octet
+represents each character. This is useful for diagnostic purposes but
+will result in rather odd looking output.
+
+=item B<show_type>
+
+show the type of the ASN1 character string. The type precedes the
+field contents. For example "BMPSTRING: Hello World".
+
+=item B<dump_der>
+
+when this option is set any fields that need to be hexdumped will
+be dumped using the DER encoding of the field. Otherwise just the
+content octets will be displayed. Both options use the RFC2253
+B<#XXXX...> format.
+
+=item B<dump_nostr>
+
+dump non character string types (for example OCTET STRING) if this
+option is not set then non character string types will be displayed
+as though each content octet represents a single character.
+
+=item B<dump_all>
+
+dump all fields. This option when used with B<dump_der> allows the
+DER encoding of the structure to be unambiguously determined.
+
+=item B<dump_unknown>
+
+dump any field whose OID is not recognised by OpenSSL.
+
+=item B<sep_comma_plus>, B<sep_comma_plus_space>, B<sep_semi_plus_space>,
+B<sep_multiline>
+
+these options determine the field separators. The first character is
+between RDNs and the second between multiple AVAs (multiple AVAs are
+very rare and their use is discouraged). The options ending in
+"space" additionally place a space after the separator to make it
+more readable. The B<sep_multiline> uses a linefeed character for
+the RDN separator and a spaced B<+> for the AVA separator. It also
+indents the fields by four characters. If no field separator is specified
+then B<sep_comma_plus_space> is used by default.
+
+=item B<dn_rev>
+
+reverse the fields of the DN. This is required by RFC2253. As a side
+effect this also reverses the order of multiple AVAs but this is
+permissible.
+
+=item B<nofname>, B<sname>, B<lname>, B<oid>
+
+these options alter how the field name is displayed. B<nofname> does
+not display the field at all. B<sname> uses the "short name" form
+(CN for commonName for example). B<lname> uses the long form.
+B<oid> represents the OID in numerical form and is useful for
+diagnostic purpose.
+
+=item B<align>
+
+align field values for a more readable output. Only usable with
+B<sep_multiline>.
+
+=item B<space_eq>
+
+places spaces round the B<=> character which follows the field
+name.
+
+=back
+
+=head2 TEXT OPTIONS
+
+As well as customising the name output format, it is also possible to
+customise the actual fields printed using the B<certopt> options when
+the B<text> option is present. The default behaviour is to print all fields.
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<compatible>
+
+use the old format. This is equivalent to specifying no output options at all.
+
+=item B<no_header>
+
+don't print header information: that is the lines saying "Certificate" and "Data".
+
+=item B<no_version>
+
+don't print out the version number.
+
+=item B<no_serial>
+
+don't print out the serial number.
+
+=item B<no_signame>
+
+don't print out the signature algorithm used.
+
+=item B<no_validity>
+
+don't print the validity, that is the B<notBefore> and B<notAfter> fields.
+
+=item B<no_subject>
+
+don't print out the subject name.
+
+=item B<no_issuer>
+
+don't print out the issuer name.
+
+=item B<no_pubkey>
+
+don't print out the public key.
+
+=item B<no_sigdump>
+
+don't give a hexadecimal dump of the certificate signature.
+
+=item B<no_aux>
+
+don't print out certificate trust information.
+
+=item B<no_extensions>
+
+don't print out any X509V3 extensions.
+
+=item B<ext_default>
+
+retain default extension behaviour: attempt to print out unsupported certificate extensions.
+
+=item B<ext_error>
+
+print an error message for unsupported certificate extensions.
+
+=item B<ext_parse>
+
+ASN1 parse unsupported extensions.
+
+=item B<ext_dump>
+
+hex dump unsupported extensions.
+
+=item B<ca_default>
+
+the value used by the B<ca> utility, equivalent to B<no_issuer>, B<no_pubkey>,
+B<no_header>, and B<no_version>.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 EXAMPLES
+
+Note: in these examples the '\' means the example should be all on one
+line.
+
+Display the contents of a certificate:
+
+ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -noout -text
+
+Display the certificate serial number:
+
+ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -noout -serial
+
+Display the certificate subject name:
+
+ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -noout -subject
+
+Display the certificate subject name in RFC2253 form:
+
+ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -noout -subject -nameopt RFC2253
+
+Display the certificate subject name in oneline form on a terminal
+supporting UTF8:
+
+ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -noout -subject -nameopt oneline,-esc_msb
+
+Display the certificate MD5 fingerprint:
+
+ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -noout -fingerprint
+
+Display the certificate SHA1 fingerprint:
+
+ openssl x509 -sha1 -in cert.pem -noout -fingerprint
+
+Convert a certificate from PEM to DER format:
+
+ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -inform PEM -out cert.der -outform DER
+
+Convert a certificate to a certificate request:
+
+ openssl x509 -x509toreq -in cert.pem -out req.pem -signkey key.pem
+
+Convert a certificate request into a self signed certificate using
+extensions for a CA:
+
+ openssl x509 -req -in careq.pem -extfile openssl.cnf -extensions v3_ca \
+	-signkey key.pem -out cacert.pem
+
+Sign a certificate request using the CA certificate above and add user
+certificate extensions:
+
+ openssl x509 -req -in req.pem -extfile openssl.cnf -extensions v3_usr \
+	-CA cacert.pem -CAkey key.pem -CAcreateserial
+
+
+Set a certificate to be trusted for SSL client use and change set its alias to
+"Steve's Class 1 CA"
+
+ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -addtrust clientAuth \
+	-setalias "Steve's Class 1 CA" -out trust.pem
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+The PEM format uses the header and footer lines:
+
+ -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
+ -----END CERTIFICATE-----
+
+it will also handle files containing:
+
+ -----BEGIN X509 CERTIFICATE-----
+ -----END X509 CERTIFICATE-----
+
+Trusted certificates have the lines
+
+ -----BEGIN TRUSTED CERTIFICATE-----
+ -----END TRUSTED CERTIFICATE-----
+
+The conversion to UTF8 format used with the name options assumes that
+T61Strings use the ISO8859-1 character set. This is wrong but Netscape
+and MSIE do this as do many certificates. So although this is incorrect
+it is more likely to display the majority of certificates correctly.
+
+The B<-fingerprint> option takes the digest of the DER encoded certificate.
+This is commonly called a "fingerprint". Because of the nature of message
+digests the fingerprint of a certificate is unique to that certificate and
+two certificates with the same fingerprint can be considered to be the same.
+
+The Netscape fingerprint uses MD5 whereas MSIE uses SHA1.
+
+The B<-email> option searches the subject name and the subject alternative
+name extension. Only unique email addresses will be printed out: it will
+not print the same address more than once.
+
+=head1 CERTIFICATE EXTENSIONS
+
+The B<-purpose> option checks the certificate extensions and determines
+what the certificate can be used for. The actual checks done are rather
+complex and include various hacks and workarounds to handle broken
+certificates and software.
+
+The same code is used when verifying untrusted certificates in chains
+so this section is useful if a chain is rejected by the verify code.
+
+The basicConstraints extension CA flag is used to determine whether the
+certificate can be used as a CA. If the CA flag is true then it is a CA,
+if the CA flag is false then it is not a CA. B<All> CAs should have the
+CA flag set to true.
+
+If the basicConstraints extension is absent then the certificate is
+considered to be a "possible CA" other extensions are checked according
+to the intended use of the certificate. A warning is given in this case
+because the certificate should really not be regarded as a CA: however
+it is allowed to be a CA to work around some broken software.
+
+If the certificate is a V1 certificate (and thus has no extensions) and
+it is self signed it is also assumed to be a CA but a warning is again
+given: this is to work around the problem of Verisign roots which are V1
+self signed certificates.
+
+If the keyUsage extension is present then additional restraints are
+made on the uses of the certificate. A CA certificate B<must> have the
+keyCertSign bit set if the keyUsage extension is present.
+
+The extended key usage extension places additional restrictions on the
+certificate uses. If this extension is present (whether critical or not)
+the key can only be used for the purposes specified.
+
+A complete description of each test is given below. The comments about
+basicConstraints and keyUsage and V1 certificates above apply to B<all>
+CA certificates.
+
+
+=over 4
+
+=item B<SSL Client>
+
+The extended key usage extension must be absent or include the "web client
+authentication" OID.  keyUsage must be absent or it must have the
+digitalSignature bit set. Netscape certificate type must be absent or it must
+have the SSL client bit set.
+
+=item B<SSL Client CA>
+
+The extended key usage extension must be absent or include the "web client
+authentication" OID. Netscape certificate type must be absent or it must have
+the SSL CA bit set: this is used as a work around if the basicConstraints
+extension is absent.
+
+=item B<SSL Server>
+
+The extended key usage extension must be absent or include the "web server
+authentication" and/or one of the SGC OIDs.  keyUsage must be absent or it
+must have the digitalSignature, the keyEncipherment set or both bits set.
+Netscape certificate type must be absent or have the SSL server bit set.
+
+=item B<SSL Server CA>
+
+The extended key usage extension must be absent or include the "web server
+authentication" and/or one of the SGC OIDs.  Netscape certificate type must
+be absent or the SSL CA bit must be set: this is used as a work around if the
+basicConstraints extension is absent.
+
+=item B<Netscape SSL Server>
+
+For Netscape SSL clients to connect to an SSL server it must have the
+keyEncipherment bit set if the keyUsage extension is present. This isn't
+always valid because some cipher suites use the key for digital signing.
+Otherwise it is the same as a normal SSL server.
+
+=item B<Common S/MIME Client Tests>
+
+The extended key usage extension must be absent or include the "email
+protection" OID. Netscape certificate type must be absent or should have the
+S/MIME bit set. If the S/MIME bit is not set in netscape certificate type
+then the SSL client bit is tolerated as an alternative but a warning is shown:
+this is because some Verisign certificates don't set the S/MIME bit.
+
+=item B<S/MIME Signing>
+
+In addition to the common S/MIME client tests the digitalSignature bit must
+be set if the keyUsage extension is present.
+
+=item B<S/MIME Encryption>
+
+In addition to the common S/MIME tests the keyEncipherment bit must be set
+if the keyUsage extension is present.
+
+=item B<S/MIME CA>
+
+The extended key usage extension must be absent or include the "email
+protection" OID. Netscape certificate type must be absent or must have the
+S/MIME CA bit set: this is used as a work around if the basicConstraints
+extension is absent. 
+
+=item B<CRL Signing>
+
+The keyUsage extension must be absent or it must have the CRL signing bit
+set.
+
+=item B<CRL Signing CA>
+
+The normal CA tests apply. Except in this case the basicConstraints extension
+must be present.
+
+=back
+
+=head1 BUGS
+
+Extensions in certificates are not transferred to certificate requests and
+vice versa.
+
+It is possible to produce invalid certificates or requests by specifying the
+wrong private key or using inconsistent options in some cases: these should
+be checked.
+
+There should be options to explicitly set such things as start and end
+dates rather than an offset from the current time.
+
+The code to implement the verify behaviour described in the B<TRUST SETTINGS>
+is currently being developed. It thus describes the intended behaviour rather
+than the current behaviour. It is hoped that it will represent reality in
+OpenSSL 0.9.5 and later.
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<req(1)|req(1)>, L<ca(1)|ca(1)>, L<genrsa(1)|genrsa(1)>,
+L<gendsa(1)|gendsa(1)>, L<verify(1)|verify(1)>,
+L<x509v3_config(5)|x509v3_config(5)> 
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+Before OpenSSL 0.9.8, the default digest for RSA keys was MD5.
+
+The hash algorithm used in the B<-subject_hash> and B<-issuer_hash> options
+before OpenSSL 1.0.0 was based on the deprecated MD5 algorithm and the encoding
+of the distinguished name. In OpenSSL 1.0.0 and later it is based on a
+canonical version of the DN using SHA1. This means that any directories using
+the old form must have their links rebuilt using B<c_rehash> or similar. 
+
+=cut
diff --git a/openssl/doc/apps/x509v3_config.pod b/openssl/doc/apps/x509v3_config.pod
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb5f79c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/openssl/doc/apps/x509v3_config.pod
@@ -0,0 +1,529 @@
+=pod
+
+=for comment openssl_manual_section:5
+
+=head1 NAME
+
+x509v3_config - X509 V3 certificate extension configuration format
+
+=head1 DESCRIPTION
+
+Several of the OpenSSL utilities can add extensions to a certificate or
+certificate request based on the contents of a configuration file.
+
+Typically the application will contain an option to point to an extension
+section. Each line of the extension section takes the form:
+
+ extension_name=[critical,] extension_options
+
+If B<critical> is present then the extension will be critical.
+
+The format of B<extension_options> depends on the value of B<extension_name>.
+
+There are four main types of extension: I<string> extensions, I<multi-valued>
+extensions, I<raw> and I<arbitrary> extensions.
+
+String extensions simply have a string which contains either the value itself
+or how it is obtained.
+
+For example:
+
+ nsComment="This is a Comment"
+
+Multi-valued extensions have a short form and a long form. The short form
+is a list of names and values:
+
+ basicConstraints=critical,CA:true,pathlen:1
+
+The long form allows the values to be placed in a separate section:
+
+ basicConstraints=critical,@bs_section
+
+ [bs_section]
+
+ CA=true
+ pathlen=1
+
+Both forms are equivalent.
+
+The syntax of raw extensions is governed by the extension code: it can
+for example contain data in multiple sections. The correct syntax to
+use is defined by the extension code itself: check out the certificate
+policies extension for an example.
+
+If an extension type is unsupported then the I<arbitrary> extension syntax
+must be used, see the L<ARBITRARY EXTENSIONS|/"ARBITRARY EXTENSIONS"> section for more details.
+
+=head1 STANDARD EXTENSIONS
+
+The following sections describe each supported extension in detail.
+
+=head2 Basic Constraints.
+
+This is a multi valued extension which indicates whether a certificate is
+a CA certificate. The first (mandatory) name is B<CA> followed by B<TRUE> or
+B<FALSE>. If B<CA> is B<TRUE> then an optional B<pathlen> name followed by an
+non-negative value can be included.
+
+For example:
+
+ basicConstraints=CA:TRUE
+
+ basicConstraints=CA:FALSE
+
+ basicConstraints=critical,CA:TRUE, pathlen:0
+
+A CA certificate B<must> include the basicConstraints value with the CA field
+set to TRUE. An end user certificate must either set CA to FALSE or exclude the
+extension entirely. Some software may require the inclusion of basicConstraints
+with CA set to FALSE for end entity certificates.
+
+The pathlen parameter indicates the maximum number of CAs that can appear
+below this one in a chain. So if you have a CA with a pathlen of zero it can
+only be used to sign end user certificates and not further CAs.
+
+
+=head2 Key Usage.
+
+Key usage is a multi valued extension consisting of a list of names of the
+permitted key usages.
+
+The supporte names are: digitalSignature, nonRepudiation, keyEncipherment,
+dataEncipherment, keyAgreement, keyCertSign, cRLSign, encipherOnly
+and decipherOnly.
+
+Examples:
+
+ keyUsage=digitalSignature, nonRepudiation
+
+ keyUsage=critical, keyCertSign
+
+
+=head2 Extended Key Usage.
+
+This extensions consists of a list of usages indicating purposes for which
+the certificate public key can be used for,
+
+These can either be object short names or the dotted numerical form of OIDs.
+While any OID can be used only certain values make sense. In particular the
+following PKIX, NS and MS values are meaningful:
+
+ Value			Meaning
+ -----			-------
+ serverAuth		SSL/TLS Web Server Authentication.
+ clientAuth		SSL/TLS Web Client Authentication.
+ codeSigning		Code signing.
+ emailProtection	E-mail Protection (S/MIME).
+ timeStamping		Trusted Timestamping
+ msCodeInd		Microsoft Individual Code Signing (authenticode)
+ msCodeCom		Microsoft Commercial Code Signing (authenticode)
+ msCTLSign		Microsoft Trust List Signing
+ msSGC			Microsoft Server Gated Crypto
+ msEFS			Microsoft Encrypted File System
+ nsSGC			Netscape Server Gated Crypto
+
+Examples:
+
+ extendedKeyUsage=critical,codeSigning,1.2.3.4
+ extendedKeyUsage=nsSGC,msSGC
+
+
+=head2 Subject Key Identifier.
+
+This is really a string extension and can take two possible values. Either
+the word B<hash> which will automatically follow the guidelines in RFC3280
+or a hex string giving the extension value to include. The use of the hex
+string is strongly discouraged.
+
+Example:
+
+ subjectKeyIdentifier=hash
+
+
+=head2 Authority Key Identifier.
+
+The authority key identifier extension permits two options. keyid and issuer:
+both can take the optional value "always".
+
+If the keyid option is present an attempt is made to copy the subject key
+identifier from the parent certificate. If the value "always" is present
+then an error is returned if the option fails.
+
+The issuer option copies the issuer and serial number from the issuer
+certificate. This will only be done if the keyid option fails or
+is not included unless the "always" flag will always include the value.
+
+Example:
+
+ authorityKeyIdentifier=keyid,issuer
+
+
+=head2 Subject Alternative Name.
+
+The subject alternative name extension allows various literal values to be
+included in the configuration file. These include B<email> (an email address)
+B<URI> a uniform resource indicator, B<DNS> (a DNS domain name), B<RID> (a
+registered ID: OBJECT IDENTIFIER), B<IP> (an IP address), B<dirName>
+(a distinguished name) and otherName.
+
+The email option include a special 'copy' value. This will automatically
+include and email addresses contained in the certificate subject name in
+the extension.
+
+The IP address used in the B<IP> options can be in either IPv4 or IPv6 format.
+
+The value of B<dirName> should point to a section containing the distinguished
+name to use as a set of name value pairs. Multi values AVAs can be formed by
+prefacing the name with a B<+> character.
+
+otherName can include arbitrary data associated with an OID: the value
+should be the OID followed by a semicolon and the content in standard
+L<ASN1_generate_nconf(3)|ASN1_generate_nconf(3)> format.
+
+Examples:
+
+ subjectAltName=email:copy,email:my@other.address,URI:http://my.url.here/
+ subjectAltName=IP:192.168.7.1
+ subjectAltName=IP:13::17
+ subjectAltName=email:my@other.address,RID:1.2.3.4
+ subjectAltName=otherName:1.2.3.4;UTF8:some other identifier
+
+ subjectAltName=dirName:dir_sect
+
+ [dir_sect]
+ C=UK
+ O=My Organization
+ OU=My Unit
+ CN=My Name
+
+
+=head2 Issuer Alternative Name.
+
+The issuer alternative name option supports all the literal options of
+subject alternative name. It does B<not> support the email:copy option because
+that would not make sense. It does support an additional issuer:copy option
+that will copy all the subject alternative name values from the issuer 
+certificate (if possible).
+
+Example:
+
+ issuserAltName = issuer:copy
+
+
+=head2 Authority Info Access.
+
+The authority information access extension gives details about how to access
+certain information relating to the CA. Its syntax is accessOID;location
+where I<location> has the same syntax as subject alternative name (except
+that email:copy is not supported). accessOID can be any valid OID but only
+certain values are meaningful, for example OCSP and caIssuers.
+
+Example:
+
+ authorityInfoAccess = OCSP;URI:http://ocsp.my.host/
+ authorityInfoAccess = caIssuers;URI:http://my.ca/ca.html
+
+
+=head2 CRL distribution points.
+
+This is a multi-valued extension whose options can be either in name:value pair
+using the same form as subject alternative name or a single value representing
+a section name containing all the distribution point fields.
+
+For a name:value pair a new DistributionPoint with the fullName field set to
+the given value both the cRLissuer and reasons fields are omitted in this case.
+
+In the single option case the section indicated contains values for each
+field. In this section:
+
+If the name is "fullname" the value field should contain the full name
+of the distribution point in the same format as subject alternative name.
+
+If the name is "relativename" then the value field should contain a section
+name whose contents represent a DN fragment to be placed in this field.
+
+The name "CRLIssuer" if present should contain a value for this field in
+subject alternative name format.
+
+If the name is "reasons" the value field should consist of a comma
+separated field containing the reasons. Valid reasons are: "keyCompromise",
+"CACompromise", "affiliationChanged", "superseded", "cessationOfOperation",
+"certificateHold", "privilegeWithdrawn" and "AACompromise".
+
+
+Simple examples:
+
+ crlDistributionPoints=URI:http://myhost.com/myca.crl
+ crlDistributionPoints=URI:http://my.com/my.crl,URI:http://oth.com/my.crl
+
+Full distribution point example:
+
+ crlDistributionPoints=crldp1_section
+
+ [crldp1_section]
+
+ fullname=URI:http://myhost.com/myca.crl
+ CRLissuer=dirName:issuer_sect
+ reasons=keyCompromise, CACompromise
+
+ [issuer_sect]
+ C=UK
+ O=Organisation
+ CN=Some Name
+
+=head2 Issuing Distribution Point
+
+This extension should only appear in CRLs. It is a multi valued extension
+whose syntax is similar to the "section" pointed to by the CRL distribution
+points extension with a few differences.
+
+The names "reasons" and "CRLissuer" are not recognized.
+
+The name "onlysomereasons" is accepted which sets this field. The value is
+in the same format as the CRL distribution point "reasons" field.
+
+The names "onlyuser", "onlyCA", "onlyAA" and "indirectCRL" are also accepted
+the values should be a boolean value (TRUE or FALSE) to indicate the value of
+the corresponding field.
+
+Example:
+
+ issuingDistributionPoint=critical, @idp_section
+
+ [idp_section]
+
+ fullname=URI:http://myhost.com/myca.crl
+ indirectCRL=TRUE
+ onlysomereasons=keyCompromise, CACompromise
+
+ [issuer_sect]
+ C=UK
+ O=Organisation
+ CN=Some Name
+
+
+=head2 Certificate Policies.
+
+This is a I<raw> extension. All the fields of this extension can be set by
+using the appropriate syntax.
+
+If you follow the PKIX recommendations and just using one OID then you just
+include the value of that OID. Multiple OIDs can be set separated by commas,
+for example:
+
+ certificatePolicies= 1.2.4.5, 1.1.3.4
+
+If you wish to include qualifiers then the policy OID and qualifiers need to
+be specified in a separate section: this is done by using the @section syntax
+instead of a literal OID value.
+
+The section referred to must include the policy OID using the name
+policyIdentifier, cPSuri qualifiers can be included using the syntax:
+
+ CPS.nnn=value
+
+userNotice qualifiers can be set using the syntax:
+
+ userNotice.nnn=@notice
+
+The value of the userNotice qualifier is specified in the relevant section.
+This section can include explicitText, organization and noticeNumbers
+options. explicitText and organization are text strings, noticeNumbers is a
+comma separated list of numbers. The organization and noticeNumbers options
+(if included) must BOTH be present. If you use the userNotice option with IE5
+then you need the 'ia5org' option at the top level to modify the encoding:
+otherwise it will not be interpreted properly.
+
+Example:
+
+ certificatePolicies=ia5org,1.2.3.4,1.5.6.7.8,@polsect
+
+ [polsect]
+
+ policyIdentifier = 1.3.5.8
+ CPS.1="http://my.host.name/"
+ CPS.2="http://my.your.name/"
+ userNotice.1=@notice
+
+ [notice]
+
+ explicitText="Explicit Text Here"
+ organization="Organisation Name"
+ noticeNumbers=1,2,3,4
+
+The B<ia5org> option changes the type of the I<organization> field. In RFC2459
+it can only be of type DisplayText. In RFC3280 IA5Strring is also permissible.
+Some software (for example some versions of MSIE) may require ia5org.
+
+=head2 Policy Constraints
+
+This is a multi-valued extension which consisting of the names
+B<requireExplicitPolicy> or B<inhibitPolicyMapping> and a non negative intger
+value. At least one component must be present.
+
+Example:
+
+ policyConstraints = requireExplicitPolicy:3
+
+
+=head2 Inhibit Any Policy
+
+This is a string extension whose value must be a non negative integer.
+
+Example:
+
+ inhibitAnyPolicy = 2
+
+
+=head2 Name Constraints
+
+The name constraints extension is a multi-valued extension. The name should
+begin with the word B<permitted> or B<excluded> followed by a B<;>. The rest of
+the name and the value follows the syntax of subjectAltName except email:copy
+is not supported and the B<IP> form should consist of an IP addresses and 
+subnet mask separated by a B</>.
+
+Examples:
+
+ nameConstraints=permitted;IP:192.168.0.0/255.255.0.0
+
+ nameConstraints=permitted;email:.somedomain.com
+
+ nameConstraints=excluded;email:.com
+
+
+=head2 OCSP No Check
+
+The OCSP No Check extension is a string extension but its value is ignored.
+
+Example:
+
+ noCheck = ignored
+
+
+=head1 DEPRECATED EXTENSIONS
+
+The following extensions are non standard, Netscape specific and largely
+obsolete. Their use in new applications is discouraged.
+
+=head2 Netscape String extensions.
+
+Netscape Comment (B<nsComment>) is a string extension containing a comment
+which will be displayed when the certificate is viewed in some browsers.
+
+Example:
+
+ nsComment = "Some Random Comment"
+
+Other supported extensions in this category are: B<nsBaseUrl>,
+B<nsRevocationUrl>, B<nsCaRevocationUrl>, B<nsRenewalUrl>, B<nsCaPolicyUrl>
+and B<nsSslServerName>.
+
+
+=head2 Netscape Certificate Type
+
+This is a multi-valued extensions which consists of a list of flags to be
+included. It was used to indicate the purposes for which a certificate could
+be used. The basicConstraints, keyUsage and extended key usage extensions are
+now used instead.
+
+Acceptable values for nsCertType are: B<client>, B<server>, B<email>,
+B<objsign>, B<reserved>, B<sslCA>, B<emailCA>, B<objCA>.
+
+
+=head1 ARBITRARY EXTENSIONS
+
+If an extension is not supported by the OpenSSL code then it must be encoded
+using the arbitrary extension format. It is also possible to use the arbitrary
+format for supported extensions. Extreme care should be taken to ensure that
+the data is formatted correctly for the given extension type.
+
+There are two ways to encode arbitrary extensions.
+
+The first way is to use the word ASN1 followed by the extension content
+using the same syntax as L<ASN1_generate_nconf(3)|ASN1_generate_nconf(3)>.
+For example:
+
+ 1.2.3.4=critical,ASN1:UTF8String:Some random data
+
+ 1.2.3.4=ASN1:SEQUENCE:seq_sect
+
+ [seq_sect]
+
+ field1 = UTF8:field1
+ field2 = UTF8:field2
+
+It is also possible to use the word DER to include the raw encoded data in any
+extension.
+
+ 1.2.3.4=critical,DER:01:02:03:04
+ 1.2.3.4=DER:01020304
+
+The value following DER is a hex dump of the DER encoding of the extension
+Any extension can be placed in this form to override the default behaviour.
+For example:
+
+ basicConstraints=critical,DER:00:01:02:03
+
+=head1 WARNING
+
+There is no guarantee that a specific implementation will process a given
+extension. It may therefore be sometimes possible to use certificates for
+purposes prohibited by their extensions because a specific application does
+not recognize or honour the values of the relevant extensions.
+
+The DER and ASN1 options should be used with caution. It is possible to create
+totally invalid extensions if they are not used carefully.
+
+
+=head1 NOTES
+
+If an extension is multi-value and a field value must contain a comma the long
+form must be used otherwise the comma would be misinterpreted as a field
+separator. For example:
+
+ subjectAltName=URI:ldap://somehost.com/CN=foo,OU=bar
+
+will produce an error but the equivalent form:
+
+ subjectAltName=@subject_alt_section
+
+ [subject_alt_section]
+ subjectAltName=URI:ldap://somehost.com/CN=foo,OU=bar
+
+is valid. 
+
+Due to the behaviour of the OpenSSL B<conf> library the same field name
+can only occur once in a section. This means that:
+
+ subjectAltName=@alt_section
+
+ [alt_section]
+
+ email=steve@here
+ email=steve@there
+
+will only recognize the last value. This can be worked around by using the form:
+
+ [alt_section]
+
+ email.1=steve@here
+ email.2=steve@there
+
+=head1 HISTORY
+
+The X509v3 extension code was first added to OpenSSL 0.9.2.
+
+Policy mappings, inhibit any policy and name constraints support was added in
+OpenSSL 0.9.8
+
+The B<directoryName> and B<otherName> option as well as the B<ASN1> option
+for arbitrary extensions was added in OpenSSL 0.9.8
+
+=head1 SEE ALSO
+
+L<req(1)|req(1)>, L<ca(1)|ca(1)>, L<x509(1)|x509(1)>,
+L<ASN1_generate_nconf(3)|ASN1_generate_nconf(3)>
+
+
+=cut